_____________________________________________________ i

®

A8300D-6th03/09/98

100-100269

ii bb ____________________________________________________

TrademarksXANTÉ®, Accel-a-Writer®, and Accel-a-Graphix® are registered trademarksof XANTÉ CORPORATION, registered in the United States Patent andTrademark Office. X•ACT™ and FilmStar™ are trademarks of XANTÉCORPORATION.

Adobe®, Adobe® Illustrator®, Adobe® Photoshop®, Adobe® PageMaker®,Adobe® PostScript®, and the PostScript® logo are registered trademarks ofAdobe Systems Incorporated, registered in the United States Patent andTrademark Office. Adobe® Acrobat™, Adobe® PostScript® 3™, Adobe®

Separator™, and PrePrint™ are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporatedwhich may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Aldus® is a registeredtrademark of Aldus Corporation, registered in the United States Patent andTrademark Office. Apple®, AppleTalk®, EtherTalk®, LaserWriter®, andMacintosh® are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered inthe United States Patent and Trademark Office. LocalTalk™, BalloonHelp™, and SimpleText™ are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc., registered in theUnited States Patent and Trademark Office.

Canon® is a registered trademark of Canon USA, registered in the UnitedStates Patent and Trademark Office. Centronics® is a registered trademark ofCentronics Data Computer Corporation, registered in the United States Patentand Trademark Office. CorelDRAW™ is a trademark of Corel Corporation.

DEC® is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation,registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

Hewlett-Packard®, HP® and LaserJet® are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard, Co., registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

Intel® and Pentium® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporationregistered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office. Token Ring® isa registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation,registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office. Hammermill®

is a registered trademark of International Paper, registered in the UnitedStates Patent and Trademark Office. ITC Avante Garde Gothic®, ITCBookman®, ITC Zapf Chancery®, and ITC Zapf Dingbats® are registeredtrademarks of International Typeface Corporation, registered in the UnitedStates Patent and Trademark Office and some foreign countries. ITCtypefaces are copyrighted © by the International Typeface Corporation.

_____________________________________________________ iii

Helvetica®, Palatino®, New Century Schoolbook®, and Times® areregistered trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries, registered inthe United States Patent and Trademark Office.

FreeHand™ is a trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Microsoft®, MS-DOS®,Windows®, and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.MultiAd Creator® is a registered trademark of MultiAd Services, Inc.,registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

Novell® and NetWare® are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., registeredin the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

Olivetti™ is a trademark of Olivetti, Inc.

QuarkXPress® is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc., registered in theUnited States Patent and Trademark Office.

UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratory, registered in theUnited States Patent and Trademark Office. ENERGY STAR® is aregistered trademark of the US EPA, registered in the United States Patentand Trademark Office.

Varityper® is a registered trademark of Varityper, Inc., registered in theUnited States Patent and Trademark Office.

Ethernet® and Xerox® are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation,registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

Manual NoticeXANTÉ CORPORATION reserves the right to make changes to thismanual and to the equipment described herein without notice. Everyeffort has been made to ensure that this manual is free ofinaccuracies and omissions. However, XANTÉ CORPORATIONmakes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, anyimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particularpurpose with regard to this manual.

XANTÉ CORPORATION assumes no responsibility for, or liabilityfor, errors contained in this manual or for incidental, special, orconsequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual,or the use of this manual in operating the equipment, or inconnection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.

ivbb ____________________________________________________

ProprietaryThe digitally encoded software included with the XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer is copyrighted © 1998 by XANTÉCORPORATION. All Rights Reserved. Patent Pending. Thissoftware may not be reproduced, modified, displayed, transferred, orcopied in any form or manner or on any media, without the expresswritten permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.

CopyrightThis manual is Copyrighted © 1998 by XANTÉ CORPORATION. AllRights Reserved. Printed in the USA. This manual may not be copied inwhole or in part, nor transferred to any other media or language without theexpress written permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.

Safety InformationThe printer generates a small amount of ozone gas during image transferin the printing process. When shipped from the factory, the printermeets the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) standard for ozone emission.

Warning! An invisible laser beam which radiates inside the laserprinter’s scanner unit can cause permanent eye damage. DONOT disassemble or try to adjust the laser scanner unit.

FCC Classification

Warning! Changes or modifications to this unit not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for aClass A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limitsare designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interferencewhen the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may causeharmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipmentin a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case theuser will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

_____________________________________________________ v

Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with theFCC Class A limits.

Power InformationEngine: 100 - 120 volts; 3.5 amps; 385 watts

Power CordThe power cord is the main disconnect device. It should be plugged into aneasily accessible outlet.

For 115 Volt Configuration:The power cord to be used with 115 Volt configuration is minimum typeSJT (SVT) 18/3, rated 250 Volts ac, 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15feet. One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug. The other end isterminated in a NEMA 5-15P plug.

For 230 Volt ConfigurationThe power cord to be used with 230 Volt configuration is minimum typeSJT (SVT) 18/3, rated 250 Volts ac, 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15feet. One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug. The other end isterminated as required by the country where it will be installed.

Le cable de transport d'energie que doit etre utilis'e la configuration 230Volts est le type minimum SJT (SVT), 18/3, nominal 250 Volts ac, 10Amps, 4.5 m long maximum. Un bout est raccorde comme exige par le paysou il sera utilis'e.

Das Netzkabel ist das haupfsachliche Diskonnektionsmittel, es sollte in eineleicht erreichbare steckdos gesteckt werden.

Das Netzkabel kann mit einer 230 Volts Konfiguration verwonder werdenvom typ: Minimum VDE or HAR, 3 X 1.00 mm2, 250 V ac, 10 Amps,maximal 4.5 m long. Ein Ende ontspriche dem Stecker IEC 320. Das andoroEnde entspricht den Anfoderungen des entsprechenden Landes.

Power ConservationAs an ENERGY STAR® Partner, XANTÉCORPORATION has determined this productmeets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines forenergy efficiency. This printer enters a low-power state after 30 minutes of inactivity. Thiscomplies with the U.S. EPA ENERGY STARProgram, but is not an EPA endorsement of theproduct.

vibb ____________________________________________________

Manufacturer’s Declaration of ConformityThe Product Accel-a-Writer 8300 has been designed and manufactured inaccordance with the following international standards:EN 50081-1 “Generic Emissions Standard for Residential,

Commercial and Light Industrial Products of” 01,Feb. 1991

EN 50082-1 “Generic Immunity Standard for Residential,Commercial and Light Industrial Products of” 01,Feb. 1991

EN 55022 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of RadioInterference Information Technology Equipment of”14, April 1987

IEC 1000-4-2 “Testing Measurement Techniques, ElectrostaticDischarge of” 1995, First Edition

IEC 1000-4-3 “Testing and Measurement Techniques, RadioFrequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test of”1995 First Edition

IEC 1000-4-4 “Testing and Measurement Techniques, ElectricalFast Transient/Burst Immunity Test of” 1995 Firstedition

MIL-STD-45662A “Calibration System Requirements”EN 60950 “Safety of Information Technology Equipment

including Electrical Business Equipment”

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified aboveconforms to the above Directives and Standards

Place Mobile, Alabama

Date December 7, 1995 Robert C. Ross, Jr.President

Colophon and CreditsThis manual was written using Adobe PageMaker, Adobe Acrobat, AdobePhotoshop, and FreeHand. The typefaces for the main body of the manualare Times, Helvetica, and Courier.

Credits: edited by Lesa Moore; written by Lane Crume, Stephanie Wright,and Pam Throgmorton; designed by Gene Everette; illustrated by PhillipShepard, Dan Wilson, Susie Simmons, and Pat Richey; special thanks toXANTÉ Engineering, XANTÉ Technical Support, and all of our reviewers.

◊ ◊ ◊

_____________________________________________________ vii

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 - Introduction .............................................................. 1-1The XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300........................................... 1-3About this Manual .................................................................... 1-4Manual Conventions ................................................................ 1-5Other Helpful Documentation.................................................. 1-6About Your Printer .................................................................. 1-6

Printer Features .................................................................. 1-8PostScript Typefaces ......................................................... 1-9

About XANTÉ Utilities ......................................................... 1-10Warranty and Product Registration ........................................ 1-10

Chapter 2 - Installation ................................................................ 2-1Introduction .............................................................................. 2-3Printer Location ....................................................................... 2-3Package Contents ..................................................................... 2-4Unpacking the Printer .............................................................. 2-5Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 ..................................... 2-7Installing Options ..................................................................... 2-9

Controller Board Upgrades ............................................... 2-9Ethernet Upgrade ........................................................ 2-9Extra Wide Print Upgrade ......................................... 2-10Internal Hard Disk Upgrade ...................................... 2-10NEIT Upgrade........................................................... 2-10Print Resolution Upgrade.......................................... 2-10RAM Upgrades ......................................................... 2-11

Paper Handling Options .................................................. 2-11Paper Feeder.............................................................. 2-12Duplexer .................................................................... 2-14

The Toner Cartridge ............................................................... 2-24The Paper Cassettes ............................................................... 2-28The Manual Feed Tray ........................................................... 2-32

viiibb ____________________________________________________

Verify the Printer Setup ......................................................... 2-35Connecting the Power Cord ............................................ 2-35Starting the Printer ........................................................... 2-35Reviewing the Start-up Page ........................................... 2-36

The Printer Interfaces ............................................................. 2-36Connecting to a Macintosh .............................................. 2-37Connecting to a PC .......................................................... 2-38

Connecting to the Parallel Port ................................. 2-38Connecting to the Serial Port .................................... 2-39

Connecting an External SCSI Disk ................................. 2-41Connecting an External SCSI Disk to the Printer ..... 2-41Initializing a Hard Disk ............................................. 2-42

Chapter 3 - Macintosh Setup ....................................................... 3-1Introduction .............................................................................. 3-3Before You Begin .................................................................... 3-3XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (Macintosh) ................................. 3-3XInstaller .................................................................................. 3-5Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ....................................................... 3-9Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ............................................. 3-9

Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver .................. 3-9Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1 ................................................ 3-9The AdobePS 8.5.1 ................................................... 3-10

PSPrinter 8.3.1 ................................................................. 3-11Installing PSPrinter 8.3.1 and the PPD ..................... 3-11PSPrinter 8.3 User Guide .......................................... 3-13Mac Watermark Plug-in Folder ................................ 3-13

AdobePS 8.5.1 ................................................................. 3-14Installing AdobePS 8.5.1 .......................................... 3-14Installing the PPD for AdobePS 8.5.1 ...................... 3-15

Configuring the PPD ....................................................... 3-16Manual PPD Setup .................................................... 3-18

Configuring the Printer .................................................... 3-19Downloads Folder .................................................................. 3-20App Drivers Folder ................................................................ 3-22

Aldus APD Folder ........................................................... 3-22Aldus PPD Folder ............................................................ 3-23QuarkXPress PDF Folder ................................................ 3-23

_____________________________________________________ ix

XANTÉ Command Center ..................................................... 3-24The General Menu ........................................................... 3-24

Printer Status ............................................................. 3-25Printer Information ................................................... 3-25Spooling .................................................................... 3-25Margin Adjustment ................................................... 3-25X•ACT Calibration ................................................... 3-26Download PostScript File ......................................... 3-26Test Directory ........................................................... 3-26Reboot Printer ........................................................... 3-26Startup Page .............................................................. 3-26

The Networking Menu .................................................... 3-27Novell Print Server ................................................... 3-27AppleTalk ................................................................. 3-28TCP/IP ...................................................................... 3-28

The Color Menu .............................................................. 3-28Transfer Curve .......................................................... 3-29CRD Directories ....................................................... 3-29Linearize ................................................................... 3-29

XANTÉ Linearizer ................................................................. 3-29Adobe Downloader ................................................................ 3-30

The File Menu ................................................................. 3-30Download Fonts ........................................................ 3-30Download PostScript File ......................................... 3-30

The Special Menu ............................................................ 3-31Printer Status ............................................................. 3-31Printer Font Directory ............................................... 3-31Other Special Menu Options ..................................... 3-31

Procedures .............................................................................. 3-31The Spooler ..................................................................... 3-32

Using the Front Panel ............................................... 3-32Using XANTÉ Command Center ............................. 3-32

Calibration with a Densitometer ...................................... 3-36Printing a Calibration Strip ....................................... 3-36Using the Densitometer ............................................ 3-37Linearizing the Densitometer Data ........................... 3-38Creating a Custom Gamma Curve ............................ 3-39

Accurate Calibration Technology.................................... 3-40

xbb ____________________________________________________

Printer Margin Adjustment .............................................. 3-42Downloaded Fonts ........................................................... 3-44

Downloading Fonts ................................................... 3-44Reviewing and Removing Downloaded Fonts ......... 3-46

Chapter 4 - PC Setup ................................................................... 4-1Introduction .............................................................................. 4-3Before You Begin .................................................................... 4-3XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC) ............................................. 4-3XANTÉ Utilities Installer ........................................................ 4-6

XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers ........................ 4-6Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ....................................................... 4-7Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ............................................. 4-8

Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers .............................. 4-8Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver ........................ 4-8Installing your Printer’s PPD .................................... 4-10Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11 ...... 4-11Deleting Previous Driver Versions ........................... 4-15

Windows 95 Drivers ........................................................ 4-16Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD.....4-16Configuring the PPD for Windows 95 ...................... 4-20

Windows NT Drivers ...................................................... 4-23Windows NT ............................................................. 4-23

Configuring the Printer .................................................... 4-28PDFs Folder ........................................................................... 4-28PS_Files Folder ...................................................................... 4-29XANTÉ Command Center ..................................................... 4-31

Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center ................. 4-31The Options Menu ........................................................... 4-32The Controller Menu ....................................................... 4-32

Select Product ........................................................... 4-33General ...................................................................... 4-33Align Paper ............................................................... 4-35CRD Directory .......................................................... 4-35Linearize ................................................................... 4-36Spooler ...................................................................... 4-36Novell ........................................................................ 4-36Test Directory ........................................................... 4-37Transfer Curve .......................................................... 4-37X•ACT ...................................................................... 4-37

_____________________________________________________ xi

The Ports Menu ............................................................... 4-38The XANTÉ Linearization Tool ............................................ 4-38Procedures .............................................................................. 4-39

The Spooler ..................................................................... 4-39Using the Front Panel ............................................... 4-39Using XANTÉ Command Center ............................. 4-39

Calibration with a Densitometer ...................................... 4-43Printing a Calibration Strip ....................................... 4-43Using the Densitometer ............................................ 4-44Linearizing the Densitometer Data ........................... 4-45Creating a Custom Gamma Curve ............................ 4-46

Accurate Calibration Technology.................................... 4-47Printer Margin Adjustment .............................................. 4-49Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk ..................... 4-51

Chapter 5 - Configuration ........................................................... 5-1Introduction .............................................................................. 5-3Printer Control ......................................................................... 5-3The Front Panel ........................................................................ 5-3

The Display Window......................................................... 5-4Front Panel Lights (LEDs) ................................................ 5-4Front Panel Keys ............................................................... 5-5

The Configuration Menu Structure .......................................... 5-8Selecting Menu Options .................................................... 5-8Resetting to Factory Defaults .......................................... 5-10

The Main Menus .................................................................... 5-10The Miscellaneous Menu ....................................................... 5-10

The Density Menu ........................................................... 5-11The DPI Menu ................................................................. 5-12The Gamma Menu ........................................................... 5-12The Initial Job Menu ....................................................... 5-12The Jam Recover Menu ................................................... 5-13The Language Menu ........................................................ 5-13The Manual Feed Menu .................................................. 5-13The NEIT Menu .............................................................. 5-14The RAM Disk Menu ...................................................... 5-14The Font Accelerator Menu ............................................. 5-15The Toner Page Menu...................................................... 5-15The Screen Menu............................................................. 5-15

xiibb ____________________________________________________

The Startup Page Menu ................................................... 5-15The Timeout Menu .......................................................... 5-16The Tray Switch Menu .................................................... 5-16The 1200 DPI Menu ........................................................ 5-16

The Interfaces Menu .............................................................. 5-17The RS232 Menu............................................................. 5-17

The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-18The Mode Menu........................................................ 5-18The Baud Rate Menu ................................................ 5-18The Parity Menu ....................................................... 5-18The Flow Control Menu............................................ 5-18The Data Bits Menu .................................................. 5-18The Stop Bits Menu .................................................. 5-19The Spool Menu........................................................ 5-19

The Parallel Menu ........................................................... 5-19The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-19The Mode Menu........................................................ 5-19The Spool Menu........................................................ 5-19

The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and LPR (Line Printer) Menus.......5-20The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-20The Mode Menu........................................................ 5-20The Spool Menu........................................................ 5-20

The Novell PServer (Novell Print Server) Menu............. 5-21The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-21The Mode Menu........................................................ 5-21The Protocol Menu ................................................... 5-21The Spool Menu........................................................ 5-21The Timeout Menu.................................................... 5-22

Chapter 6 - PPD Settings ............................................................. 6-1Introduction .............................................................................. 6-3About the PPD ......................................................................... 6-3Selecting PPD Options ............................................................. 6-3

In a Macintosh Environment ............................................. 6-4In a Windows 95 Environment .......................................... 6-6In a Windows 3.1 Environment ......................................... 6-8

The PPD Menus ....................................................................... 6-9Duplex ............................................................................. 6-10Enhanced Screens ............................................................ 6-10

_____________________________________________________ xiii

Fast Imaging .................................................................... 6-11Gamma ............................................................................ 6-11Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift ................................ 6-12Mirror Print ...................................................................... 6-12Negative Print .................................................................. 6-13Resolution ........................................................................ 6-14Save Spooled Job............................................................. 6-15Smooth Shading .............................................................. 6-15Tray Switch ..................................................................... 6-16

Chapter 7 - Using Media and Toner ........................................... 7-1Introduction .............................................................................. 7-3Media Specifications ................................................................ 7-3

Selecting Media ................................................................. 7-3Storing Media .................................................................... 7-4

Media Sizes .............................................................................. 7-5Standard Media Sizes ........................................................ 7-6XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes ............................................... 7-7

Feeding Media to the Printer .................................................... 7-8Determining the Leading Edge.......................................... 7-8The Paper Cassettes ........................................................... 7-8The Manual Feed Tray ...................................................... 7-9Tray Chaining .................................................................. 7-10

Using Special Media .............................................................. 7-10Printing Computer-to-Film .............................................. 7-10Printing Transparencies ................................................... 7-11Printing Envelopes .......................................................... 7-12Printing Labels ................................................................ 7-12Printing on Custom Sized Media..................................... 7-13

Printing Double-Sided Copy .................................................. 7-14Manual Double-Sided Copy ............................................ 7-14Duplexing ........................................................................ 7-15

Using the Duplexer ................................................... 7-16Handling the Toner Cartridge ................................................ 7-17

Adjusting Toner Output ................................................... 7-18Redistributing Toner ................................................. 7-18Changing the Density Menu ..................................... 7-18

xivbb ____________________________________________________

Chapter 8- Advanced Features .................................................... 8-1Introduction .............................................................................. 8-3Levels of Gray.......................................................................... 8-3Line Screens ............................................................................. 8-4Scanner Resolutions ................................................................. 8-4

Line Art Scanning ............................................................. 8-4Halftone Scanning ............................................................. 8-5TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats ................................................. 8-5

Gamma Corrections ................................................................. 8-6Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology ................................ 8-8Enhanced Screening ................................................................. 8-9Font Accelerator and RAM Disk ............................................. 8-9Accurate Calibration Technology .......................................... 8-10

Appendix A................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B ................................................................................... B-1

Glossary ........................................................................................ G-1

Index ............................................................................................... I-1

◊◊◊

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-1

Chapter 1 - Introduction

Chapter OverviewThe XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300 ..................................................1-3About this Manual ...........................................................................1-4Manual Conventions .......................................................................1-5Other Helpful Documentation......................................................... 1-6About Your Printer ..........................................................................1-6

Printer Features .........................................................................1-8PostScript Typefaces................................................................. 1-9

About XANTÉ Utilities ................................................................1-10Warranty and Product Registration ...............................................1-10

1-2 Introductionbb________________________________________

Notes

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-3

The XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300

Fig. 1.1 XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300

Your new Accel-a-Writer 8300 features Adobe PostScript 3. Thehigh quality laser prints are excellent for everyday office needs aswell as for the demanding field of desktop publishing.

1-4 Introductionbb________________________________________

About this Manual

This User’s Guide documents the installation, setup, and operation ofthe Accel-a-Writer 8300.

Chapter 1—Introduction provides an overview of this manual, theXANTÉ Utilities, your printer’s main features, and your printerwarranty.

Chapter 2—Installation provides instructions for unpacking andsetting up your printer, installing the paper handling and externalSCSI disk options, loading the toner and paper cassettes, andconnecting it to Macintosh and PC interfaces.

Chapter 3—Macintosh Setup describes the contents and use of theXANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the Macintosh. This includesinstallation instructions for the Adobe PostScript printer drivers, yourprinter’s PPD, XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉ Linearizer, theAdobe Downloader and procedures for using many of your printer’sinnovative features.

Chapter 4—PC Setup describes the contents and use of theXANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the PC. This includes installationinstructions for the Adobe PostScript printer drivers, your printer’sPPD, XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool,and procedures for using many of your printer’s innovative features.

Chapter 5—Configuration describes how to configure the defaultsettings for the printer features using the front panel keys andconfiguration menus.

Chapter 6—PPD Settings describes the printer features that can beset through an application’s Print dialog box using your printer’sPPD (PostScript Printer Description file).

Chapter 7—Media and Toner describes how to select and usevarious media types and sizes, how to print double-sided copies, andhow to handle your printer’s toner cartridge.

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-5

Chapter 8—Advanced Features describes XANTÉ’s NEIT(Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology), Halftone CalibrationTechnology, Font Accelerator, Enhanced Screening, and X•ACT(XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology) features.

Chapter 9—Maintenance and Technical Specifications describeshow to care for your printer and contains your printer’s technicalspecifications and warranty.

Appendix A—Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting tips,gives an overview of XANTÉ service options, and describes how toreach XANTÉ Technical Support.

Appendix B—Application Notes and Page Design providesinstructions and tips for using the printer in mainstream applicationenvironments and some general page design tips.

Glossary—defines many terms related to your printer, XANTÉutilities, and the printing industry.

The Accel-a-Writer 8300 Menu quick reference sheet illustratesthe printer’s front panel menu structure and lists XANTÉ supportresources.

Manual ConventionsThe following conventions are used in this manual:

Courier indicates information you must type or whichdisplays on screen.

↵ indicates that you need to press the Return keyon a Macintosh or the Enter key on a PC.

Note: indicates additional or emphasized information.

Caution: indicates instructions which if not followed canor will cause damage to files or equipment.

Warning! indicates instructions which must be followedexactly or personal injury can occur.

1-6 Introductionbb________________________________________

Other Helpful DocumentationPlease visit our Web site at www.xante.com for the latestinformation about XANTÉ products and services.

You may find the following publications helpful when working withAdobe PostScript printing.

PostScript Language Reference Manual, Second Edition. This manual,published by Addison Wesley, is designed for advanced users, such asprogrammers, who work with Adobe PostScript operators.

PostScript Language Tutorial and Cookbook. This manual,published by Addison Wesley, is designed for those who want tolearn about working directly in the Adobe PostScript language.

Most bookstores and many computer businesses either keep thesebooks in stock or can order them for you.

About Your PrinterThe Accel-a-Writer 8300’s high-end features allow you to producenear typeset quality work, suitable for camera-ready production. Thestandard, smooth 600 x 600 dpi resolution can be upgraded to 1200 x1200 dpi.

Your printer features true Adobe PostScript 3, not an emulation.Features such as the Smooth Shading operator, expanded font setsfor leading operating systems and applications, international fontsupport, and Advanced Page Processing provide fast, high qualityimaging on your XANTÉ printer.

XANTÉ’s patent pending Accurate Calibration Technology (X•ACT)and optional Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT) providegreater control over printer output than previously available from a laserprinter. X•ACT allows you to calibrate the printer’s line lengths. NEITis the first technology to address the problems typically associatedproducing negative images on a laser printer.

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-7

The AMD 29040 33 MHz RISC processor, 8 MB RAM, andXANTÉ’s technology help ensure fast, reliable, performance.Memory upgrades provide the extra space required for higherresolution and oversized printing.

Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 offers out-of-the-box advanced paperhandling capability. You can print on paper, film, transparencies,labels, and envelopes. The printer features a standard input capacityof 350 sheets—250 sheets in the standard paper cassette and 100sheets in the manual feed tray. If you require a higher input capacity,you can add up to two optional paper feeders, which can eachsupport an additional 250 sheet input cassette.

The cassettes support up to ledger/tabloid (11" x 17")/A3 size paper.The manual feed tray supports media from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x147 mm) to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm). An upgrade isavailable to expand print regions on oversized media.

The optional duplexer allows you to print automatically on bothsides of the paper, with a choice of edge (side-to-side, book style) ortumble (flip chart) duplexing.

With simultaneously active serial, parallel, LocalTalk, and (optional)Ethernet interfaces, Macintosh and PC computers can send filesconcurrently to the Accel-a-Writer 8300. You do not have to sendsoftware commands or manually set hardware switches to use adifferent interface.

Used in conjunction with XANTÉ’s FilmStar 2, your Accel-a-Writer8300 becomes a complete desktop pre-press film center. Use yourprinter’s advanced imaging features to print high quality imagesdirectly to XANTÉ’s Myriad Film. After processing throughFilmStar 2, the film can be used to burn metal plates or silk screenemulsions.

1-8 Introductionbb________________________________________

Printer Features

Your versatile Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer offers many outstandingfeatures including the following:

• Standard 600 x 600 dpi resolution

•` Resolution upgrade—1200 x 1200 dpi*

• 8 page per minute engine speed

• AMD 29040/33 MHz RISC processor

• Adobe PostScript 3, including Smooth Shading andAdvanced Page Processing

• Up to ledger (11"x17")/A3 size regular paper handling

• Custom sized printing from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147mm) to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) allowing fullbleed printing for 11" x 17" (279 mm x 432 mm)documents*

• Extra Wide Print (optional) enlarges the print region on12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) media to 11.95" x24.87" (304 mm x 632 mm)*

• 136 PostScript fonts

• Font Type 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 42 support

• Simultaneously active serial, parallel, LocalTalk, and(optional) Ethernet interfaces

• Ethernet (optional) to support EtherTalk, Novell NetWarePrint Server, and TCP/IP protocols

• SCSI disk interface

• Internal IDE disk (optional)

• XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Technology

• XANTÉ Enhanced Screening Technology

• XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology (X•ACT)

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-9

• XANTÉ Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT[optional])

• 8 MB RAM, upgradeable to 128 MB RAM

• 2 standard input trays and optional cassettes

• Up to two additional Paper feeders (optional)

• Duplexer (optional)*

• XANTÉ Utilities (PC and Macintosh)

• Canon microfine toner

• Densitometer Support

• I/O Spooling

• Font Accelerator

• Mirror Print

• Negative Print

• Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift Features

* See the “Printer Memory Requirements” in chapter 9.

PostScript Typefaces

Your printer features 136 PostScript typefaces. These typefaces areprinter resident so they are available for fast access withoutdownloading. They are designed to work with the leading operatingsystems including Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT, andMacintosh OS. “Page Design” in appendix B provides informationabout using typefaces to achieve a professional finish to yourdocuments.

1-10 Introductionbb________________________________________

About XANTÉ UtilitiesThe XANTÉ Utilities, shipped with your printer, include easy-to-use, menu driven programs and files to make working with your newprinter more convenient. The CD-ROM contains the AdobePostScript Printer Drivers, PPDs for XANTÉ printers, special filesrequired for QuarkXPress and older versions of some Aldusapplications, and the XANTÉ Command Center and Linearizersoftware packages, which allow advanced calibration and setup ofyour printer.

Warranty and Product RegistrationChapter 10 contains the warranty on your Accel-a-Writer 8300printer. Please be sure to return the warranty sheet included withyour printer package. Returning this sheet registers your printer andentitles you to a free subscription to XANTÉ’s Accel-a-Writingnewsletter. Our publication features articles on printing, new optionsas they become available, and tips for using your printer to the bestadvantage.

◊ ◊ ◊

__________________________________________ Installation 2-1

Chapter 2 - Installation

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................2-3Printer Location .............................................................................. 2-3Package Contents ............................................................................2-4Unpacking the Printer ..................................................................... 2-5Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 ............................................. 2-7Installing Options ............................................................................2-9

Controller Board Upgrades ...................................................... 2-9Paper Handling Options .........................................................2-11

The Toner Cartridge ......................................................................2-24The Paper Cassettes ......................................................................2-28The Manual Feed Tray .................................................................. 2-32Verify the Printer Setup ................................................................. 2-35

Connecting the Power Cord....................................................2-35Starting the Printer .................................................................. 2-35Reviewing the Start-up Page ..................................................2-36

The Printer Interfaces .................................................................... 2-36Connecting to a Macintosh ..................................................... 2-37Connecting to a PC ................................................................. 2-38Connecting an External SCSI Disk ........................................2-41

2-2 Installationbb_________________________________________

Notes

__________________________________________ Installation 2-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes how to set up your new Accel-a-Writer 8300printer. It includes finding the right location; unpacking the printer;installing paper handling options, toner, and paper; connecting thepower cord; printing a start-up page; and connecting to an interface.

Printer LocationWhen choosing the location for your printer, find an area that

• Is level, sturdy, and capable of supporting approximately44 lbs (19.98 kg)

• Has sufficient clearance for operation and maintenance

• Has a temperature range between 50˚ to 90.5˚ Fahrenheit(10˚ to 32.5˚ Celsius) without rapid changes

• Has a relative humidity between 20% and 80%

• Is well ventilated

• Is away from direct sunlight, open flames, refrigerators,water faucets, humidifiers, heaters, or similar equipment

• Is away from strong vibrations or electromagnetic fields

• Is close enough to the host computer to allow propercommunication: within 10 feet (3 m) for parallel; within25 feet (7.5 m) for serial; within 1000 feet (305 m) forLocalTalk

• Is close to a grounded electrical outlet with the propervoltage

Note: Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around theprinter; they react chemically with the toner.

2-4 Installationbb_________________________________________

Package ContentsYour printer package contains the following items:

• Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer

• 250 sheet cassette

• Power cord

• Accel-a-Writer 8300 User’s Guide (this manual)

• XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, with the Adobe PostScriptPrinter driver, PPDs, XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉLinearizer, and other software

• Toner cartridge (EP-J)

Optional items from the following list ship separately.

• Additional 250 sheet paper cassettes

• Paper feeder (up to two can be added)

• Duplexer

Note: RAM, internal hard disk, print resolution, Ethernet,NEIT, and extra wide print upgrades ordered with yourprinter are installed at the factory before shipping.

If you do not receive your full shipment or if anything is damaged,immediately contact XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8393 inthe US and Canada or at 334-342-4846 elsewhere.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-5

Unpacking the PrinterYou may want to save the packing materials that protect your printerduring shipping to use if you have to move or ship the printer.

1. Remove everything except the printer in its protective bagfrom the shipping box.

Warning! The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)without the toner, cassettes, and media installed. Havesomeone help you lift it.

2. Lift the printer out of the box.

3. Remove the plastic wrap from around the printer.

4. Remove the packing tape from the outside of the front manualfeed tray and the back cover.

5. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch on the rightside of the printer and tilting the cover up and back (fig. 2.1).

Fig. 2.1 Open the Top Cover

2-6 Installationbb_________________________________________

6. Remove the tape, protective sheet, and the shipping spacers bypulling them up and out of the printer (fig. 2.2).

Two Cardboard Shipping Spacers

Fig. 2.2 Remove the Two Cardboard Shipping Spacers

__________________________________________ Installation 2-7

Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300Before you begin this setup, take a few minutes to familiarizeyourself with the printer. Figures 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 provide anoverview of the front, back, and inside of your printer.

Front Panel

Output Tray

Top Cover

Top Cover Latch

Power Switch

Front Cover

Manual Feed Tray

Tray Extender

Tabloid Extender

Fig. 2.3 Front View of the Printer

2-8 Installationbb_________________________________________

Back Cover

CassettePower Receptacle

Output Tray

Auxiliary Output Tray

Paper Stop

Fig. 2.4 Rear View of the Printer

Toner Cartridge

Cleaning Brush

Front Cover

Top Cover

Top Cover Latch

Fig. 2.5 Inner Front View of the Printer

__________________________________________ Installation 2-9

Installing OptionsYou can order controller board upgrades and paper handling optionsto enhance your printer’s performance. Controller board upgrades areeither factory installed or shipped with instructions. The paperhandling options are shipped separately and must be installed by theuser. This section describes these options, the procedures to receiveinstallation instructions or service for the controller board upgrades,and instructions for installation of the paper handling options.

Controller Board Upgrades

If controller board upgrades are ordered with your printer, they areinstalled at the factory before the printer is shipped. If ordered later,Ethernet, internal hard disk, print resolution, and RAM upgrades areshipped with installation and setup instructions; the extra wide printand NEIT upgrades must be performed at the factory.

To return your printer for a NEIT or extra wide print upgrade, callXANTÉ Technical Support for an RGA (Return GoodsAuthorization) number. Printers without RGA numbers are notaccepted. You are responsible for shipping costs. You can reachXANTÉ Technical Support at 800-926-8393 in the US and Canadaor at 334-342-4846 elsewhere from 7:00 a.m. until 7:00 p.m. Centraltime Monday through Thursday or 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Friday.

Ethernet UpgradeThe Ethernet upgrade is designed to support EtherTalk, NovellNetWare print server, and TCP/IP protocols in an Ethernetenvironment on thinnet coax (10Base2) or twisted-pair (10BaseT).XANTÉ’s EtherTalk interface is designed to work on EtherTalkPhase 2 networks.

See the Ethernet Upgrade manual that is shipped with your upgradepackage for installation and setup instructions.

2-10 Installationbb_________________________________________

Extra Wide Print UpgradeThe extra wide print option expands the imageable area of 12.00" x19.00" and 12.00" x 25.00" size media.

Standard Extra WideImageable Areas Imageable Areas

12.00" x 19.00" 11.63" x 18.87" 11.95" x 18.87"(295 mm x 479 mm) (304 mm x 479 mm)

12.00" x 25.00" 11.63" x 24.87" 11.95" x 24.87"(295 mm x 632 mm) (304 mm x 632 mm)

See chapter 7, “Media and Toner,” for details.

Internal Hard Disk UpgradeThe internal hard disk upgrade provides extra space to storedownloaded fonts and allows you to implement the spooling featureon the printer’s interfaces. Your printer can support one internal harddisk and up to seven external SCSI drives.

See “Connecting an External SCSI Disk” later in this chapter fordetails.

NEIT UpgradeThe NEIT (Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology) upgrade helpsensure clear crisp hairline images and text by minimizing pluggingon negative images.

See “The NEIT Menu” in chapter 5 and “Negative EnhancedImaging Technology” in chapter 8 for details.

Print Resolution UpgradeThe standard resolution of your Accel-a-Writer 8300 is 600 x 600dpi. The resolution upgrade expands your printer’s resolutioncapability to include 1200 x 1200 dpi.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-11

Because your printer’s memory requirements increase when youprint at a higher resolution (see “Printer Memory Requirements” inchapter 9), a resolution upgrade is customized for your needs andusually includes the RAM upgrade required for your printingenvironment. Call XANTÉ Technical Support Representative todetermine the correct configuration for your environment.

Note: If your printer is configured with 20 MB or more of RAM,1200 dpi will appear in the DPI menu on the front panel.However, unless the corresponding resolution upgrade hasbeen added to your printer, the copy will print incorrectly ifthe higher resolution is selected.

See “The DPI Menu” in chapter 5 and “Resolution” in chapter 6 fordetails.

RAM UpgradesYour printer’s standard memory configuration is 8 MB of RAM.This can be upgraded to a maximum of 128 MB using 4, 16, or 32MB SIMMs. Additional RAM allows the printer to handle larger,more complex graphics and text files, higher resolutions, and moredownloaded fonts.

See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) to configure the RAMin the PPD. See “The RAM Disk Menu” in chapter 5 and “FontAccelerator and RAM Disk” in chapter 8 to create and use a RAMdisk.

Paper Handling Options

The standard Accel-a-Writer 8300 comes with a 250 sheet cassette.Up to two optional paper feeders and cassettes can be added toincrease the feeding capacity of the printer. See “Feeding Media tothe Printer” in chapter 7 and “The Paper Cassettes” later in this chapterfor details.

2-12 Installationbb_________________________________________

The optional duplexer allows you to print on both sides of the paper.You can choose edge (side-to-side, standard book style) or tumble(flip chart style) duplexing. See “Duplexing” in chapter 7 for details.

Paper FeederYou can install up to two additional paper feeders, each of which canhold a 250 sheet cassette. The paper cassettes and manual feed traycan be used to increase the capacity for a single media size with thetray chaining option or as sources for different sizes or types of printmedia. For example, to use both letter and ledger size media, load upto 250 sheets of one size in the standard cassette and 250 sheets ofthe other size in an optional cassette or the manual feed tray.

Installing the Paper Feeder

1. Unpack the paper feeder and, with the connector to the backleft, set the feeder next to the printer.

2. Turn off your printer and disconnect the power cord and allinterface cables.

Warning! The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)without the toner, cassettes, and media installed. Havesomeone help you lift it.

3. Hold the printer above the feeder, making sure not to lift it bythe multipurpose feeder or the feed roller. Lower the printeronto the feeder, aligning the feeder pegs with the printerconnectors (fig. 2.6).

__________________________________________ Installation 2-13

Fig. 2.6 Align the Printer over the Feeder

4. Reconnect the power cord and all interface cables.

5. Set up the cassette for the size media you plan to use and loadit with up to 250 sheets of media. (See “The Paper Cassettes”later in this chapter for details).

6. Slide the filled paper cassette into the feeder. Then, turn onyour printer.

2-14 Installationbb_________________________________________

Duplexer The duplexer allows you to print on both sides of the paper. You canchoose edge (side to side standard book style) or tumble (flip chartstyle) duplexing. See chapter 7, “Duplexing,” for details on using theduplexer and appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” to solve jam or printquality problems.

The optional package includes the duplexer, a replacement backcover for the printer, and a cable guide (fig. 2.7).

Release Latches

Back Unit

Power Receptacle

Ventilation Slots

AligningPointer

CableSlot

Connector

TopCover

Replacement Back Cable Guide

Fig. 2.7 The Duplexer Package

__________________________________________ Installation 2-15

Installing the Duplexer The duplexer and printer should be installed in an operatingenvironment which meets the guidelines in “Printer Location” earlierin this chapter.

To prepare the printer and replace its back cover

1. Turn off the printer and disconnect its power cord from theprinter and power source. Disconnect any attached interfacecables.

2. Remove the printer’s paper cassette and set it aside for now.

3. Open the printer’s back cover and locate the spacer. Tilt thespacer up, pull it out (fig. 2.8), and keep it handy.

Fig. 2.8 Remove the Spacer

2-16 Installationbb_________________________________________

4. Remove the printer’s back cover. First, push the cover slightlyto the left (fig. 2.9; 1); then gently pull it out from the rightside (fig. 2.9; 2).

Note: Store the original cover in a safe place so you canreplace it later if you remove the duplexer.

1

2

Fig. 2.9 Remove the Printer’s Back Cover

5. Install the replacement back cover (included with the duplexer).First, insert the cover’s left bottom tab into the slot on the printer;then, push the cover right as far as it can go (fig. 2.9).

6. Replace the spacer by positioning its bottom hook around thecover’s left bottom tab and swinging the spacer down until itsnaps securely into the back cover (fig. 2.10).

Fig. 2.10 Replace the Spacer

__________________________________________ Installation 2-17

To mount the printer on the duplexer

1. Unpack the duplexer, making sure to remove all the shippingmaterials including the polystyrene, tape, plastic bags, andcardboard. (See the included instructions for unpacking).

Warning: The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)without the toner, cassette, and media installed. Havesomeone help you lift it.

2. Move the printer to the side to make room for the duplexer.

Caution: Always use the hollowed hand grip areas when pickingup the duplexer (fig. 2.11). Never move it with theprinter attached.

3. Hold the duplexer by the hand grip areas and place it where theprinter had been.

Fig. 2.11 Pick up the Duplexer

2-18 Installationbb_________________________________________

4. Pull up the back cover release latch and slide the back unitopen as far as it will go (fig. 2.12).

Fig. 2.12 Open the Back Unit

Warning! Make sure to use both the top cover and back coverlatches. If only the green top cover latch is pulled, theunit can fall and cause personal injury or damage theequipment.

5. Remove the back unit by pulling up both the top cover andback cover latches and lifting the unit straight up (fig. 2.13).

Fig. 2.13 Remove the Back Unit

6. Move the duplexer’s power cable to the side to prevent it fromcatching on the printer during installation (fig. 2.14).

__________________________________________ Installation 2-19

Fig. 2.14 Move the Power Cable to the Side

Warning: The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)without the toner, cassette, and media installed. Havesomeone help you lift it.

7. Hold the printer above the duplexer, making sure not to lift itby the multipurpose feeder or the feed roller. Lower the printeronto the duplexer, aligning the duplexer pegs with the printerconnectors (fig. 2.15).

Fig. 2.15 Align the Printer over the Duplexer

2-20 Installationbb_________________________________________

8. Connect the duplexer’s power cable to the printer’s powerreceptacle (fig. 2.16).

Fig. 2.16 Connect the Duplexer Power Cable to the Printer.

9. Position the cable guide as shown in figure 2.17. Then, pushthe guide into the back cover bars and lower it into place.

Fig. 2.17 Attach the Cable Guide

__________________________________________ Installation 2-21

10. Plug the interface cable into the back of the printer (fig. 2.18; 1).Then, as you face the back of the printer, pull the interface cableclose to the printer to the right, and place it in the cable rest (fig.2.18; 2).

12

Fig. 2.18 Plug in the Interface Cable

11. Align the back unit over the rear of the duplexer, making surethe pointers line up; pull up the back unit’s top and back coverlatches; then, lower it onto the duplexer (fig. 2.19).

Note: Make certain the duplexer back unit fits against theprinter. A gap may cause a paper jam or output not toduplex and either Cover Open or Paper Jam toappear in the window.

Fig. 2.19 Attach the Back Unit to the Duplexer

2-22 Installationbb_________________________________________

12. Make certain the paper cassette cover is in place to prevent thepossibility of a paper jam (fig. 2.29). Then, slide the cassetteinto the printer until it snaps in place.

13. Plug the printer’s power cord into the duplexer’s powerreceptacle and into the power source. Then, turn the printer on.

Removing the Duplexer

1. Turn off the printer, disconnect the power cord from the powersupply and the duplexer.

2. Remove the paper cassette by pulling it straight out of theprinter.

3. Pull up the back cover release latch and slide the back unitopen as far as it will go; then, remove the back unit by pullingup both the top and back cover latches, and lifting the unitstraight up (fig. 2.20).

Fig. 2.20 Remove the Back Unit

4. Disconnect the interface cables from the printer and lift themout of the cable rest (fig. 2.18).

5. Remove the cable guide by lifting it up and gently pulling itout of printer (fig. 2.17).

6. Disconnect the duplexer’s power cord from the printer (fig. 2.16).

__________________________________________ Installation 2-23

Warning: The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)without the toner, media, and cassette installed. Havesomeone help you lift it.

7. Hold the printer as shown in figure 2.15 and lift it up and offthe duplexer.

8. Realign the back unit over the rear of the duplexer, making surethe pointers line up; pull up the back unit’s top and back coverlatches; then, lower the unit onto the duplexer (fig. 2.19).

9. Hold the back cover latch up (open) while you slide the backunit until it closes firmly into place.

10. Remove the back replacement cover from the printer bypushing it left slightly, and then gently pulling it out from theright side first (fig. 2.9).

11. Replace the printer’s original back cover by inserting thecover’s left bottom tab into the slot on the printer, and thenpushing it right as far as it will go.

12. Replace the spacer by positioning its bottom hook around thecover’s left bottom tab and swinging the spacer down until itsnaps securely into the back cover (fig. 2.10).

13. Close the printer’s back cover and place the paper cassetteback into the printer.

14. Reattach the interface and power cables to the printer.

15. Plug the printer’s power cable into the power source.

Storing the DuplexerStore the duplexer with the replacement back cover and cable guidein its original box with the packing materials around it. The storagelocation should maintain a 10˚ to 35˚ C (50˚ to 95˚ F) temperatureand a 10% to 80% relative humidity.

2-24 Installationbb_________________________________________

The Toner CartridgeYour Accel-a-Writer 8300 ships with an EP-J toner cartridge. Thiscartridge combines the toner and drum, so that you only have toreplace one consumable. The EP-J cartridge averages 8000 letter/A4size copies at 4% coverage.

Caution: The toner cartridge is sensitive to bright lights and directsunlight. Leave it in its protective bag until you areready to load it into the printer. To prevent data loss orequipment damage, keep the cartridge, which contains amagnet, away from your hard disk(s) and monitor.

This section describes how to remove an old toner cartridge andinstall a new one. See chapter 7, “Media and Toner,” for informationabout adjusting toner density.

Caution: Never move or ship the printer with a toner cartridgeinstalled. Toner spills can damage the printer.

1. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch and tilting thecover up and back (fig. 2.1).

2. Grasp the old toner cartridge in the center, pull it up and out(fig. 2.21), and dispose of it following safety laws andregulations.

Warning! The toner is highly combustible. Never dispose of it byincineration.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-25

Fig. 2.21 Remove the Toner Cartridge

3. Locate the static charge eliminator (fig. 2.22) and clean itusing the green cleaning brush (located inside the top coverarea on the left). To do this, gently run the brush back andforth across the eliminator several times.

Fig. 2.22 Clean the Static Charge Eliminator

2-26 Installationbb_________________________________________

4. Locate the transfer guide and clean off the dust and paperresidue by wiping the area with a soft, dry, lint-free, cleancloth (fig. 2.23).

Fig. 2.23 Clean the Transfer Guide

5. Remove the toner cartridge from its package. Gently rock it backand forth to distribute toner throughout the cartridge (fig. 2.24).

Fig. 2.24 Distribute the Toner

6. Gently pull off the tab labeled “Remove the black sheetslowly” and discard it (fig. 2.25).

__________________________________________ Installation 2-27

7. Gently, flex the orange tab on the end of the sealing tape. Pull thethe tab and tape from the toner cartridge and discard it (fig. 2.25).

Fig. 2.25 Remove the Toner Sealing Tape

8. Align the toner cartridge on the runners; then, slide the cartridgeinto the printer until it rests securely in place (fig. 2.26).

Fig. 2.26 Load the Toner Cartridge

9. Close the printer’s top cover until it clicks in place.

2-28 Installationbb_________________________________________

The Paper CassettesOne 250 sheet paper cassette ships with your printer. The NorthAmerican paper cassette is set up to feed letter, legal, 11" x 17", andexecutive paper sizes. The international paper cassette is set up tofeed A4, A3, A5, B4, and B5 paper sizes. Additional cassettes andoptional paper feeders can be ordered for your printer (see “PaperFeeder” earlier in this chapter).

This section describes how to install and load the North Americanpaper cassette. See chapter 7 for information about selecting andusing various media types and sizes.

1. Unpack the paper cassette by removing the spacer from thecassette. Then remove the filament tape and plastic bag fromthe cassette cover.

2. Configure the cassette for the correct media size. On the frontof the paper cassette are illustrations of this process (fig. 2.27).

LT R

1 2 3 4

c

ab

Fig. 2.27 Configure the Cassette Media Size

__________________________________________ Installation 2-29

a. Make sure the size indicator label on the front of thecassette displays the correct setting. The green dial onthe top left at the front of the cassette controls the label.To change this setting, roll the green dial forward untilthe correct size appears on the label (fig. 2.27; a).

The green dial changes the size indicator label and setskeys that notify the printer engine of the media sizeconfiguration. This dial has three settings that can be usedfor letter (LTR), and one setting each for executive (EXE),legal (LGL), and 11" x 17" paper sizes.

Note: If this setting is incorrect, printing errors canoccur or the image may be printed incorrectlyon the media.

b. Make sure the pointer on the right media guide is set forthe correct media size. To change this setting, adjust thetwo green side guides (fig 2.27; b).

c. Make sure the back media guide is set for the correctmedia size (fig. 2.27; c). To change this setting, tilt thebar forward to free the three bottom tabs; then, lift outthe bar. With the bar still tilted forward, align it over thecorrect setting, slide the tabs into the slots, and tilt thebar upright into position.

2-30 Installationbb_________________________________________

3. Prepare up to 250 sheets (approximately 1" [25 mm] thick orless) of 20 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper following therecommendations in “The Paper Cassettes” in chapter 7:

4. Slide the paper printing side down, leading edge first, underthe two clips on each end of the media bar and under the twoclips at the front corners of the side guides (fig. 2.28).

Caution: Make sure the paper stack does not exceed theupper paper limit marked on the media bar (fig.2.28). Overloading a cassette causes paper jams.

LT R

Paper Limit Marks

Fig. 2.28 Load the Paper Cassette

__________________________________________ Installation 2-31

5. Align the cassette cover over the back of the cassette (fig.2.29) and lower it into place.

LT R

Fig. 2.29 Install the Cassette Cover

6. Slide the cassette into the printer until it snaps into place.

2-32 Installationbb_________________________________________

7. Extend the auxiliary output tray when using legal, 11" x 17",and A3 paper.

Auxiliary Output TrayPaper Stop

Release Area

Fig. 2.30 Open the Auxiliary Output Tray

a. Open the auxiliary output tray by pressing down on therelease area (fig. 2.30).

b. Pull out the paper tray extension, and flip the paper stopup and into place.

8. Select the paper cassette as the media source using the TraySelect key or the Tray Switch menu on the printer’s frontpanel. The media source also can be selected using the Printdialog box in your application.

The Manual Feed TrayYour printer’s built-in manual feed tray is designed to feed up to 100sheets of 20 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper, up to 25 sheets of MyriadFilm, up to 50 transparencies, or up to 40 sheets of labels. It supportsnon-standard size media, including envelopes, that measure from 3.90"x 5.80" (99 mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm).

This section describes how to load the manual feed tray. See chapter 7for information about selecting and using various media types and sizesin the manual feed tray.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-33

1. Open the manual feed tray by grasping the hand grip andpulling out and down (fig. 2.31 ).

Fig. 2.31 Open the Manual feed Tray

2. Remove the shipping cardboard covering the tray extenderswhen first setting up the printer.

3. Open the tray extender by grasping it in the center and pullingout until it snaps up into place. For large media, open thetabloid extender by pushing it up from the bottom and flippingit over into place (fig. 2.32).

Tray Extender

Tabloid Extender

Fig. 2.32 Pull Out the Tray and Tabloid Extenders

2-34 Installationbb_________________________________________

4. Prepare media following the recommendations in “The ManualFeed Tray” in chapter 7 (approximately 3/8" [9 mm] or less).

5. Slide the media into the manual feed tray with the printing sideup, leading edge first (fig. 2.33).

Caution: Make sure the paper stack does not exceed theupper paper limit indicated by tabs on the tray’sside paper guides (fig. 2.33). Overloading the traymay cause paper jams.

Paper GuidesPaper Limit Mark

Paper Limit Mark

Fig. 2.33 Load the Manual feed Tray

6. Adjust the paper guides on each side so they rest lightlyagainst the paper without causing it to buckle (fig. 2.33).

7. Adjust the paper stop on the output tray if you are usingoversized paper (fig. 2.30).

__________________________________________ Installation 2-35

8. Select the manual feed tray as the media source using the TraySelect key or the Tray Switch menu on the printer’s frontpanel. The media source also can be selected using the Printdialog box in your application.

Verify the Printer SetupCheck the printer setup by starting the printer and reviewing thestart-up page that automatically prints.

Connecting the Power Cord

The power receptacle is on the back of the printer at the lower left.

1. Make sure the printer’s power switch is off (the O is pressed in).

2. Connect the female end of the power cord to the printer.

3. Connect the male end of the power cord to a standard electricaloutlet (grounded AC outlet).

Note: You may want to use a surge protected outlet to help preventfluctuations in the power source from damaging your printer.

Starting the Printer

The power switch is on the front of the printer in the lower rightcorner.

1. Locate the power switch.

2. Press the | on the power switch to turn on the printer. Thegreen Ready light flashes and Accel-a-Writer appears in thedisplay window.

2-36 Installationbb_________________________________________

After the printer is powered on, it takes approximately 90 seconds for itto run initialization programs and self-tests. After this warm-up, theReady light stops flashing and remains on and the start-up pageautomatically prints.

If your printer does not power on when you turn the switch on, checkto be sure the power cord is properly attached and the power switchis ON (the | side of the switch is depressed).

Reviewing the Start-up Page

Each time you turn on the printer, a start-up page prints after theinitialization period unless you disable this feature.

Review this page to be sure that the correct resolution, installed RAM,and optional hard disks are recognized by the printer. The start-up pagealso lists the printer’s name, page count, enabled interfaces, and networkinformation (if the Ethernet upgrade is installed).

See “The Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5 and chapter 3 (Macintosh) orchapter 4 (PC) to control the start-up page feature.

The Printer InterfacesOnce the printer is set up, select the interface to connect the printer toyour computer or network. Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 has four standardinterface ports on the back—LocalTalk, serial, parallel, and a SCSI port.An Ethernet port can be added as an option. Because these interfaces aresimultaneously active, the printer can receive jobs from differentoperating environments without hardware switching.

SCSI Serial LocalTalkParallel Ethernet

Fig. 2.34 Accel-a-Writer 8300 Ports

__________________________________________ Installation 2-37

The port you select to connect your printer to your computer depends onyour computer type, the available ports, your software applications, andyour network environment.

Instructions for connecting and configuring the interfaces inMacintosh and PC environments are in this chapter. For informationabout connecting and configuring the Ethernet port, see the EthernetUpgrade manual that is shipped with the upgrade package.

Connecting to a Macintosh

In a Macintosh environment without Ethernet, your host computercommunicates with the printer via the LocalTalk port. You need twoLocalTalk connector boxes with DIN-8 connectors, a standard phonecable (RJ-11), and two terminators.

ConnectorBox

ConnectorBox

TerminatingResistor

RJ-11 Cable

DIN-8 Connector

Fig. 2.35 LocalTalk Connector Boxes, Resistors, and Cable

To connect your printer via the LocalTalk port

1. Turn off your printer and your computer.

2. Plug the DIN-8 connector on one LocalTalk connector boxinto the printer’s 8-pin LocalTalk port.

3. Plug the DIN-8 connector on the second LocalTalk connectorbox into the Macintosh’s printer port (refer to your AppleMacintosh manual).

4. Connect the two LocalTalk connector boxes with the RJ-11phone cable.

2-38 Installationbb_________________________________________

5. Plug the terminating resistor(s) into the open socket(s) in theconnector box(es) (fig. 2.35).

Note: Be sure to terminate the open sockets on the ends of yourLocalTalk network with the terminators supplied withyour LocalTalk connectors (fig. 2.35). (There shouldonly be two open sockets on the network, one at eachend.) Closing open sockets helps speed data transmissionand helps ensure the printer is available in the Chooser.

6. Turn on the printer and computer.

7. Install and configure the printer driver and PPD following theprocedures in chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup.”

Connecting to a PC

In a PC environment without Ethernet, your host computercommunicates with the printer via the parallel or serial port.

Use the parallel port if your computer has a Centronics parallel portavailable and is within 10 ft. (3 m) of the printer. Use the serial portif a parallel port is not available or if the computer is between 10 ft.(3 m) and 25 ft. (7.6 m) from the printer.

Connecting to the Parallel PortUse a standard Centronics parallel cable to connect your computerand printer (fig. 2.36). The parallel cable has a 36-pin maleconnector to attach to the printer and a 25-pin male connector toattach to the computer.

36-pin ConnectorTo Printer

25-pin ConnectorTo Host Computer

Fig. 2.36 The Parallel Cable

__________________________________________ Installation 2-39

To connect your printer and computer using the parallel port

1. Turn off your printer and computer.

2. Plug the 36-pin connector end of the cable into the printer’sparallel port (fig. 2.34).

3. Plug the 25-pin end of the cable into the computer’s parallel port.

4. Turn on your computer and then the printer.

5. Install and configure the printer driver and PPD following theprocedures in chapter 4, “PC Setup.”

Connecting to the Serial Port

Use a standard serial cable to connect your computer and printer (fig.2.37). This cable has either a 9-pin or 25-pin female connector toattach to the computer and a 9-pin male connector to attach to theprinter.

Connector to Printer: 9-pin Connector to PC:25-pin

or9-pin

Fig. 2.37 The Serial Cables

2-40 Installationbb_________________________________________

To connect your printer and computer using the serial port

1. Turn the power off to your printer and computer.

2. Plug the 9-pin male connector on the serial cable into theprinter’s serial port.

3. Plug the other connector (either a 25-pin or a 9-pin femaleconnector) into the computer’s serial port.

4. Turn on your computer and then the printer.

5. Install and configure the printer driver and PPD following theprocedures in chapter 4, “PC Setup.”

Before you print, make sure your computer and printer are set to usethe same baud rate, flow control and parity settings.

The factory default printer settings are 9600 baud, XON/XOFF flowcontrol, No Parity (None), and 8 data bits. These settings are used inmost serial printing environments.

See your computer manual for details on checking and changingsettings. You can check and change the printer’s serial interfacesettings using the front panel menus (see “Selecting Menu Options”in chapter 5).

Baud RateBaud rate is the rate at which serial data is sent between the computerand the printer. Your printer supports 1200, 9600, and 19200 baud rates.The factory default is 9600.

Flow ControlFlow control is the mechanism the printer uses to signal thecomputer that it is ready to accept data. Your printer supportsXON/XOFF (software) and DTR/DSR (hardware) flow control.XON/XOFF is the printer’s factory default. Incorrect flow controlsettings cause erratic serial printing.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-41

ParityParity is used to check for transmission errors by comparing thegroup of data bits sent to the group received. A loss of data duringtransmission usually results in a change to the group size. Yourprinter supports five parity settings, None, Even, Odd, Mark, andSpace. The factory default is None.

Connecting an External SCSI Disk

You printer can support up to seven external SCSI disks and oneinternal IDE disk. A hard disk allows you to download fonts to theprinter and to take advantage of the printer’s spooling feature. A 20MB external SCSI disk can store approximately 500 to 600 fonts.

To connect an external SCSI disk to your printer, use a SCSIperipheral cable (25-pin to 50-pin). If the disk is not internallyterminated, you also need an external SCSI terminator. See the SCSIdisk documentation for termination characteristics.

Connecting an External SCSI Disk to the PrinterSCSI disks are identified by device numbers such as the example infigure 2.38. Each SCSI disk in a chain must have a unique number.Usually, the disk number or ID is set using a switch on the back ofthe SCSI disk.

Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 Disk 4 Disk 5 Disk 6

Fig. 2.38 SCSI Disk Device Numbers

Caution: Do not turn on the printer or any attached SCSI disk untilthe disk has been assigned a number. See your SCSI diskdocumentation for details on assigning this number.

2-42 Installationbb_________________________________________

To connect an external SCSI disk to your printer

1. Make sure the printer and the disk are turned off.

2. If the disk is not internally terminated, install the external SCSIterminator following the instructions included with the harddisk.

3. Plug the 25-pin male connector of the SCSI cable into theprinter’s SCSI port and the 50-pin connector into thecomputer’s SCSI port following the instructions included withthe hard disk.

4. Turn on the SCSI disk first and wait a few seconds for it to spinup. Then, turn on the printer. This ensures that the printer willrecognize the SCSI disk. The ID numbers and sizes of the SCSIdisks attached to the printer are listed on the start-up page.

5. Check the start-up page or print a test page to be sure the SCSIdisk is listed with the proper device number and disk size.

Initializing a Hard DiskA hard disk must be initialized before it can be used to storedownloaded fonts or to set up a spooling queue.

Caution: Initializing a disk erases all information stored on it.Make sure you select the correct printer and use thecorrect PostScript file when initializing a hard disk.

The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contains several PostScript files(InitdskX.ps) that can be downloaded to initialize your printer’s harddisk(s):

• The numbered files initialize the SCSI disk with the same devicenumber (Initdsk1.ps intializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.psinitializes SCSI disk #2, etc.) on the printer.

• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the IDE drivedesignated as A or B, respectively, on the printer.

• The Initdsks.ps file initializes all SCSI and IDE drives attachedto the printer.

__________________________________________ Installation 2-43

Initializing a Hard Disk with a Macintosh

1. Select the correct file for the disk that you want to initializefrom the Downloads folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.

2. Download the file to your printer using the DownloadPostScript File menu in either XANTÉ Command Center orAdobe Downloader (see chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup” fordetails).

Initializing a Hard Disk with the PC

1. Select the correct file for the disk that you want to initializefrom the PS_files folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.

2. Download the file to your printer using the Send PostScriptFile option of the General menu in XANTÉ Command Center(see chapter 4, “PC Setup” for details).

◊ ◊ ◊

2-44 Installationbb_________________________________________

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-1

Chapter 3 - Macintosh Setup

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................3-3Before You Begin ............................................................................3-3XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the Macintosh ............................... 3-3XANTÉ Utilities Installer ...............................................................3-5Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ..............................................................3-9Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ....................................................3-9

Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver .........................3-9PSPrinter 8.3.1 ........................................................................3-11AdobePS 8.5.1 ........................................................................3-14Configuring the PPD ..............................................................3-16Configuring the Printer ...........................................................3-19

Downloads Folder .........................................................................3-20App Drivers Folder .......................................................................3-22

Aldus APD Folder .................................................................. 3-22Aldus PPD Folder ................................................................... 3-23QuarkXPress PDF Folder ....................................................... 3-23

XANTÉ Command Center ............................................................3-24The General Menu .................................................................. 3-24The Networking Menu ...........................................................3-27The Color Menu .....................................................................3-28

XANTÉ Linearizer ........................................................................3-29Adobe Downloader .......................................................................3-30

The File Menu ........................................................................3-30The Special Menu ................................................................... 3-31

Procedures .....................................................................................3-31The Spooler ............................................................................3-32Calibration with a Densitometer .............................................3-36Accurate Calibration Technology ........................................... 3-40Printer Margin Adjustment ..................................................... 3-42Downloaded Fonts .................................................................. 3-44

3-2 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Notes

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes the contents and use of the XANTÉ UtilitiesCD-ROM for Macintosh. This includes instructions for installingand configuring the Adobe PostScript printer driver, your printer’sPPD (PostScript Printer Description) file, XANTÉ CommandCenter, XANTÉ Linearizer, and the Adobe Downloader. Theprocedures section contains instructions for using some of yourprinter’s innovative features.

Before You BeginYou should be familiar with all standard Macintosh procedures. Thisincludes how to click, drag, copy, choose commands, select options,use buttons and boxes, locate files, and scroll. If you have questionson any of these procedures, see your Macintosh documentation.

XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (Macintosh)The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, shipped with your printer, includesAdobe PostScript printer drivers, PPDs, XANTÉ Utilities, PostScriptfiles, and other programs to help you setup, customize, and troubleshootyour printer. This section briefly describes the main folders in theMacintosh section of the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.

The Accel-a-Graphix folder contains CRDs, ICC profiles, and defaultcurves for use with XANTÉ’s Accel-a-Graphix CT4.

The Acrobat folder contains an Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 Installer anda ReadMe-Reader file that describes the system requirements and use ofAcrobat Reader 3.0. See “Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0” later in thischapter.

The App Drivers folder contains printer drivers required by someAldus products and QuarkXPress. See “App Drivers Folder” later inthis chapter for details.

3-4 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

The ATM 4.0.2 folder contains an installation program and user guidefor the Adobe Type Manager. To install, open the Adobe 4.0.2 Installerfolder in the ATM 4.0.2 folder and double-click on the installation icon.The user guide can be viewed and printed using Adobe Reader 3.0,provided on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.

The ATM-J Upgrade folder contains an installation program andassociated files for a Kanji upgrade of Adobe Type Manager.

The Downloads folder contains PostScript files that can be downloadedto your printer using XANTÉ Command Center or the AdobeDownloader. See the Overview.PDF file in the Downloads folder on theCD-ROM and “Downloads Folder” later in this chapter.

The NetPeeks folder contains self-extracting files for two networkutility programs and the associated documentation. EtherHelp 3.1(EtherHelp.sea) is used to capture packets on an Ethernet network.LocalHelp 2.0 is used to capture packets on a LocalTalk network.Double-click on each icon to install that utility on your Macintosh. Readall documentation that is installed with the software before using theseprograms.

The PostScript 3 Fonts folder contains the screen fonts used byXANTÉ PostScript 3 printers for display on Macintosh screens and aninstallation program. On Macintosh operating system prior to 8.0, youmust remove some of these fonts to reduce the number in your Fontsfolder to 128 or less.

The Printer Drivers folder contains the Adobe PostScript drivers,XANTÉ PPDs, and installation programs for Roman and Kanji fontprinters.

The Xnstaller launches the installation program for the most recentversion of the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver if you select a printerinstallation. If you prefer to use the earlier Adobe PostScript PrinterDriver, these files can be loaded individually. See the Readme.PDF fileon the CD-ROM and “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” later in thischapter for details.

The Product Manuals folder contains PDF files of the current versionsof the manuals for XANTÉ printers. These manuals can be viewed onscreen or printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-5

The Read1st.txt text file describes how to install Adobe AcrobatReader 3.0 from the CD-ROM.

The Readme.PDF file provides an overview of the Macintosh sectionof the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM. This file can be opened usingAcrobat Reader 3.0.

The Screen Fonts folder contains the fonts used by XANTÉ PostScriptLevel 2 printers for display on Macintosh screens. If you do not alreadyhave these fonts, copy this folder into the System: Fonts folder on yourMacintosh.

The XANTÉ Utilities folder contains XANTÉ Command Center,XANTÉ Linearizer, Adobe Downloader, and a Downloader Read Mefile. See “XInstaller” and the individual utility sections later in thischapter for details.

XInstaller is an installation program for XANTÉ Command Center,XANTÉ Linearizer, Adobe Downloader, PostScript PPDs for yourprinter, and the appropriate PDF (Printer Description File) forQuarkXPress (if it is installed on your system). XInstaller can beconfigured to launch the AdobePS Printer Driver Installer when theXANTÉ Utilities installation is complete. See “XInstaller” later in thischapter.

Always check the Readme files on the CD-ROM for information thatwas not available at the time this manual was printed.

XInstallerXInstaller can be configured to install only the XANTÉ Utilities or toinstall the utilities, your printer’s PPD, your printer’s QuarkXPress PDF(if QuarkXPress is installed on your system), and launch the AdobePS8.5.1 driver installer.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.XInstaller is launched automatically. To start the programmanually, open the XANTE Utilities folder on the CD-ROMand double-click the XInstaller icon.

3-6 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

2. Click Continue to begin the installation.

3. Read the welcome note; then click Continue to bring up theXInstaller screen (fig. 3.1).

Fig. 3.1 The XInstaller Screen

4. To start XInstaller, configure the installation options (see listbelow); then, click Install. To exit the installation programwithout installing any files, click Quit.

Installation options:

• Select the XANTÉ Utilities option to install only theutilities (XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉ Linearizer,and the Adobe Downloader). Use this option if you wantto use PSPrinter 8.3.1 instead of AdobePS 8.5.1 (see“Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver” later inthis chapter).

• Select one or more of the XANTÉ printer options to installthe utilities, the PPD(s) and the QuarkXPress PDF(s) forthe selected printers; then launch the AdobePS Installer,which installs the AdobePS 8.5 printer driver.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-7

• If necessary, change the destination disk or folder used bythe installation program from the Install Location box inthe lower left of the screen.

5. After the XANTÉ Utilities are installed, select Continue andrepeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional components or selectQuit and go to the appropriate section from the following listfor the type of installation you chose.

• If you chose the XANTÉ Utilities option, go to “AdobePostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter to load theprinter driver and your printer’s PPD.

• If you chose to install one or more printers and if theAdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver is not currently installed onyour Macintosh, go to step 6 to proceed with the AdobePS8.5.1 Installation.

• If you chose to install one or more printers and theAdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver is already installed on yourMacintosh, follow the procedures in “Configuring thePrinter” and “Configuring the PPD” later in this chapter tocomplete the setup.

6. Click Continue in the AdobePS 8.5.1 entry screen.

7. Read the license agreement and select Accept to bring up theinstallation screen (fig. 3.2). If you select Decline, theinstallation terminates.

3-8 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Fig. 3.2 AdobePS Installation Screen

8. If necessary, change the destination disk for the driver in theInstall Location box; then click Install. Follow the instructionson screen. When the installation is complete, the followingscreen appears.

Fig. 3.3 Installation Successful Screen

9. Click Restart to complete the installation.

10. Complete the setup after your Macintosh restarts following theprocedures in “Configuring the Printer” and “Configuring thePPD” later in this chapter.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-9

Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0The documentation on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM is in theAdobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). You can installAdobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 from the CD-ROM.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.The XInstaller is launched automatically.

2. Click Continue in the first two screens to bring up theXInstaller screen (fig. 3.1); then, click Quit to exit theInstallation program.

3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon; then, double-clickthe Acrobat icon.

4. Check the ReadMe-Reader file; then, double-click the Reader3.0 Installer icon to install Acrobat Reader 3.0.

Adobe PostScript Printer DriversBefore using your printer, you must install and configure the AdobePostScript printer driver and your printer’s PPD on your Macintosh.

Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver

The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contains the Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1driver and the AdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver. Select the driver thatbest fits your system setup and printing requirements.

Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1The Adobe PSPrinter driver requires the following system setup:

• Macintosh running System 7 or later (PSPrinter does not run onthe Macintosh 128K, 512K, or 512Ke computers)

• A minimum of 4 MB of memory

3-10 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

• A minimum of 700 K of hard disk space plus the space requiredfor the PPDs

• Chooser version 7.3 or later (supplied with the PSPrinterinstallation)

PSPrinter 8.3.1 provides the following features:

• Support for Adobe PostScript Level 2

• Full support for ColorSync 2.0

• Improved speed when printing JPEG compressed images

• Ability to save print options for subsequent jobs

The AdobePS 8.5.1The AdobePS printer driver requires the following system setup:

• Macintosh running System 7.1 or later (AdobePS does not runon the Macintosh 128K, 512K, or 512Ke computers)

• A minimum of 4 MB of memory

• A minimum of 2 MB of hard disk space plus the space requiredfor the PPDs

• Chooser version 7.3 or later (supplied with the PSPrinterinstallation)

AdobePS 8.5.1 provides the following features:

• Support for Adobe PostScript 3 and Adobe PostScript Level 2

• Full support for ColorSync 2.1

• Simplified printer setup and printing interface

• Ability to change printers from within the Print dialog box

• Single-pass foreground printing, which provides faster printingof large or complex documents

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-11

PSPrinter 8.3.1

The PSPrinter installation program loads PSPrinter 8.3.1, Chooserversion 7.3 (if necessary), the PSPrinter Read Me, and the latestPPDs. The installation overwrites any earlier version of PSPrinterbut will not overwrite other printer drivers.

Installing PSPrinter 8.3.1 and the PPDThe installer loads both the PSPrinter driver and the PPD for theXANTÉ printer into the appropriate folders on your Macintosh.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.The XInstaller is launched automatically.

2. Click Continue in the first two screens to bring up theXInstaller screen (fig. 3.1); then, click Quit to exit theInstallation program.

3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon.

4. Double-click the Printer Drivers icon; then double-click thePSPrinter 8.3.1 icon.

5. Double-click the appropriate language folder; thendouble-click the Installer icon.

3-12 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

6. Click OK in the Adobe Printer Driver entry screen to bring upthe PSPrinter Installation window.

Fig. 3.4 PSPrinter Installation Window

5. Click Install to load the files listed in the Easy Install box. Ifyou prefer to load only specific components, click Customize;select the files to load; then click Install.

6. Read the license agreement and select Accept to bring up theinstallation screen. If you select Decline, the installationterminates.

7. Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation.

8. Read the message in the Congratulations box; then click OK.

9. Click Quit to leave the installation program.

The Adobe PSPrinter driver and your printer’s PPD are installed.Use the procedure in “Configuring the PPD” later in this chapter tocomplete the driver setup.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-13

PSPrinter 8.3 User GuideA User Guide for the Adobe PSPrinter 8.3 print driver and aREADME file are provided in each language directory in thePSPrinter 8.3 folder. The guide provides detailed information aboutinstalling and using the Adobe PSPrinter Driver.

The guide is less than 50 pages and can be printed using theDownload PostScript File command in either the File menu of theAdobe Downloader utility or the General menu of XANTÉCommand Center. See the appropriate sections later in this chapterfor information about installing and using these programs.

Mac Watermark Plug-in FolderA Mac Watermark Plug-in folder is provided in each languagedirectory in the PSPrinter 8.3 folder. This folder contains the AdobePSPrinter 8.3 Watermark plug-in for the Macintosh and a UserGuide. These files allow you to customize your output withunderlying watermarks.

This plug-in requires the following system setup:

• PSPrinter 8.3.1 (the plug-in does not work with AdobePS 8.5.1)

• Macintosh running System 7.1 or later

• 100 K of available disk space for the plug-in, preferences, andWatermarks folder

The User Guide for the Watermark Plug-in 1.0 is included as aSimpleText document in the folder. It describes all systemrequirements and the installation procedure. To print the User Guide,which is less than 10 pages, double-click WM UserGuide to open thefile; then print from the SimpleText File menu.

3-14 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

AdobePS 8.5.1

If you use the individual printer installation option of the XInstaller,the AdobePS 8.5.1 is launched automatically following theinstallation of XANTÉ Utilities and your printer’s PPD. TheAdobePS installation program also can be launched from the PrinterDrivers folder.

The AdobePS installation program loads AdobePS, an AdobePSReadme file, an AdobePS driver extension called Custom Page intothe Printer Descriptions folder, and other files required for the AdobePostScript printer driver. It does not load PPD files automatically.The installation overwrites any earlier version of AdobePS but willnot overwrite other printer drivers. Check the Readme First file inthe appropriate language folder of the AdobePS 8.5.1 folder beforebeginning the driver installation.

Installing AdobePS 8.5.1The installer loads the AdobePS driver on your Macintosh.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.The XInstaller is launched automatically.

2. Click Continue in the first two screens to bring up theXInstaller screen (fig. 3.1); then, click Quit to exit theInstallation program.

3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon.

4. Double-click the Printer Drivers icon; then double-click theAdobePS 8.5.1 icon.

5. Double-click the appropriate language folder; thendouble-click the Installer icon.

6. Follow steps 6 through 9 in “XInstaller” earlier in this chapter.

7. Install your printer’s PPD (see the next section) when yourMacintosh restarts.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-15

Installing the PPD for AdobePS 8.5.1The XANTÉ PPDs are in the AdobePS 8.5.1 folder. If you did notuse the XInstaller to load the driver and PPD for your printer, followthe procedure in this section to copy the PPD from the CD-ROM toyour system.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.The XInstaller is launched automatically.

2. Click Continue in the first two screens to bring up theXInstaller screen (fig. 3.1); then, click Quit to exit theInstallation program.

3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon.

4. Double-click the Printer Drivers icon; then double-click theAdobePS 8.5.1 icon.

5. Open the Printer Descriptions folder, if necessary, and selectthe PPD for your printer.

6. Drag the PPD to the System: Extensions: Printer Descriptionsfolder on your Macintosh.

The AdobePS printer driver and your printer’s PPD are installed. Usethe procedure in the next section, “Configuring the PPD,” tocomplete the driver setup.

3-16 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Configuring the PPD

After the PSPrinter or AdobePS driver and your printer’s PPD areinstalled, select and configure your printer’s PPD.

1. Select Chooser from the Apple menu. The Chooser windowappears (fig. 3.5).

2. Select the AdobePS or the PSPrinter icon from the box on theleft (top left in a network environment); a list of availableprinters appears in the box on the right. Highlight your printerand double-click. If the setup reminder dialog box appears,click OK to continue.

Note: You may have to scroll to find the driver icon andyour printer listing. If the printer does not appear inthe list, check all cable connections.

Fig. 3.5 The Chooser Window in a Network Environment

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-17

3. Click Setup in the Chooser window (fig. 3.5), if necessary, tobring up the PPD setup dialog box (fig. 3.6).

Fig. 3.6 PPD Setup Dialog Box

4. Click Auto Setup (fig. 3.6). The Adobe PostScript printerdriver automatically selects and configures the correct PPD foryour printer. If you have multiple PPDs for your type ofprinter, select the correct PPD when prompted.

5. Click OK when the Auto Setup process is complete to acceptthe selections. You return to the Chooser window where anicon appears next to the printer you set up.

Note: If using PSPrinter, turn background printing off in theChooser window (fig. 3.5) to maximize processingperformance. This option does not appear if theAdobePS driver is selected.

6. Close the Chooser window.

Note: If the following window appears during the Auto Setup or ifyou want to check or change your PPD configuration, see“Manual PPD Setup” in the next section.

Fig. 3.7 Autosetup Failed Message

3-18 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Manual PPD SetupUse the following procedure to check or change your printer’s PPDconfiguration or if the Auto Setup procedure failed.

1. Follow the first three steps in “Configuring the PPD” in theprevious section.

2. Click Select PPD (fig. 3.6). A screen appears from which youcan select a PPD file.

3. Highlight your printer’s PPD and click Select. You return tothe PPD setup dialog box (fig. 3.6).

4. Click Configure to open the Installable Options screen (fig. 3.8).

Fig. 3.8 Installable Options Screen

5. Configure the options that are installed or implemented onyour printer. You may need to use a scroll bar to access all ofthe options.

a. Select Installed in the menus for the upgrades that areinstalled on your printer, such as optional trays, the extrawide print upgrade, and the optional duplexer(Accel-a-Writer 8300 only).

b. Select True in the Spooler Enabled menu to enable theSave Spooled Job menu in your application Print dialogbox.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-19

Note: This does not enable the Spooler feature on yourprinter. The Spooler must be enabled on theprinter, using either the front panel Interfacesmenus (see chapter 5) or XANTÉ CommandCenter (see “The Spooler” later in this chapter) forthe Save Spooled Job feature to function properly.

c. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on yourprinter.

6. Click OK to confirm your configuration and close theInstallable Options screen.

7. Click OK to close the PPD setup dialog box; then, close theChooser window.

Note: When you add a printer from the network, go through eitherthe Auto Setup or manual setup procedure to ensure that theprinter is recognized by the network.

Configuring the Printer

If necessary, configure the printer’s communication interface usingthe front panel. See Chapter 5, “Configuration,” for details.

1. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.

2. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connected toyour computer (LOCALTALK or ETHERTALK).

3. Select the ENABLE menu.

4. Select the YES option.

5. Press the Reset key until READY/IDLE appears in the display.

3-20 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

6. Verify the setup.

a. Make sure your Macintosh is connected to the printerwith a LocalTalk or Ethernet cable.

b. Locate and open the XANTÉ Utilities folder; then,double-click the XANTÉ Command Center icon.

c. Select Printer Status from the General menu to display adialog box showing the current printer status.

Note: If the status dialog box does not appear check allcable connections and be sure the printerinterface you are using is enabled on the printer.

d. Click OK in the dialog box; then select Quit from theFile menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.

Downloads FolderThe Downloads folder contains Adobe PostScript files andOverview.PDF, which describes these files. Download the PostScriptfiles to your printer using the Adobe Downloader or the DownloadPostScript File option in XANTÉ Command Center (see “AdobeDownloader” and “XANTÉ Command Center” later in this chapter).

The Clean.ps file prints cleaning instructions for the Accel-a-Writer8100, 8200, and PlateMaker II.

The CT4_cal.ps file prints instructions for performing colorcalibration of the CT4 from a Macintosh and a PC.

The Ftp.ps file prints instructions for uploading and downloadingfiles to XANTÉ’s FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site.

The InitdskX.ps files are used to initialize hard disks attached to orinstalled in your printer.

• The numbered files initialize the SCSI disk with the same devicenumber (Initdsk1.ps initializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.psinitializes SCSI disk #2, etc.) on the printer.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-21

• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the internal IDEdrive of the same designation (the A or B disk) on the printer.

• The Initdsks.ps file initializes all SCSI and IDE drives attachedto the printer.

Initializing a disk erases all information stored on the disk. See“Initializing a Hard Disk” in chapter 2.

The Novell34.ps file prints instructions for setting up a XANTÉprinter on a Novell network.

The Parmdump.ps file prints a list of the settings for thecommunication devices currently configured for your printer. If youcall XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this pageto check your setup.

The Setzone.ps file allows you to set the EtherTalk zone name forthe printer. Open the file in a text editor, such as SimpleText, andchange “name of zone” in the parentheses to the name of yourEtherTalk zone. Save the file, and download it to your printer. Theprinter must be restarted before the change is effective.

The Set_IP.ps file allows you to set the IP address for your printer.Open the file in a text editor, such as SimpleText, and change the IPaddress in the parentheses to the IP address of your printer. Save thefile, and download it to your printer. The printer must be restartedbefore the change is effective.

The Startpg.off file disables the printer’s start-up page feature,which prevents it from printing automatically each time the printer isrestarted (see “Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5).

The Startpg.on file enables the startup page feature, which causes itto print automatically each time the printer is restarted (see “StartupPage Menu” in chapter 5).

The Sysparm.ps file prints a list of the current system parameters. Ifyou call XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print thispage to check your setup.

3-22 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

App Drivers FolderSome Aldus PageMaker and FreeHand versions and QuarkXPressrequire special files in addition to the standard PPD supplied foryour printer. These files are supplied by XANTÉ in the App Driversfolder on the CD-ROM. See appendix B, “Application Notes andPage Design” for additional information.

Note: Some of the advanced features on XANTÉ printers may notbe available when using older application versions.

Aldus APD Folder

This folder contains the Kanji version of APD (Aldus PrinterDescription) files for Aldus PageMaker versions 4.01 and earlier andAldus FreeHand versions 2.02 and earlier. Call Technical Support torequest a copy of the APDs for a Roman printer.

1. Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver andyour printer’s PPD following the instructions in “AdobePostScript Printer Drivers” earlier in this chapter.

2. Copy your printer’s APD from the Aldus APD folder on theXANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM to the APD folder in the AldusFolder in your Macintosh System Folder.

Note: The name of the APD indicates the XANTÉ printer itsupports.

3. Check your application documentation for instructions onselecting and using the APD.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-23

Aldus PPD Folder

The Standard and Kanji folders in the Aldus PPD folder containPPDs for Aldus PageMaker versions 4.2 to 5.0 and Aldus FreeHandversion 3.0 and 3.1. To install these PPDs

1. Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver andyour printer’s PPD following the instructions in “AdobePostScript Printer Drivers” earlier in this chapter.

2. Copy your printer’s PPD from the Standard or Kanji folder in theAldus PPD folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM to the AldusPPD folder in the System Folder on your Macintosh.

Note: The name of the PPD indicates the XANTÉ printer itsupports. In the Standard folder, a “W” after the nameindicates the PPD is for use on printers with the wideformat option.

3. Check you application documentation for instructions onselecting and using the PPD.

QuarkXPress PDF Folder

The Standard and Kanji folders in the QuarkXPress folder contain PDFs(Printer Description Files) for each XANTÉ printer. These files arerequired by QuarkXPress in addition to the PPD. Use these PDFs,created by XANTÉ, to ensure the highest quality output from yourprinter and QuarkXPress.

The XInstaller loads the QuarkXPress PDF if you choose an individualprinter installation. To load these PDFs manually

1. Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver andyour printer’s PPD following the instructions in “AdobePostScript Printer Drivers” earlier in this chapter.

2. Copy your printer’s PDF from the Standard or Kanji folder inthe QuarkXPress PDF folder on the XANTÉ UtilitiesCD-ROM to the appropriate folder on your Macintosh.

3-24 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

• For versions 3.2 and earlier, copy the PDF to the samefolder as the QuarkXPress application.

• For versions 3.3 and later, copy the PDF to theQuarkXPress PDF folder.

3. Remove “Balloon Help” from the Quark folder forQuarkXPress 3.3.2.

Note: The name of the PDF indicates the XANTÉ Printer itsupports. In the Standard folder, a “W” after the nameindicates the PDF is for use on printers with the wideformat option.

XANTÉ Command CenterXANTÉ Command Center is a utility that allows you to check andcontrol many of your printer’s functions from your Macintosh. TheFile and Edit menus are similar to other Macintosh applications andare not described in detail in this section.

The General Menu

The General menu allows you to communicate with the printer toperform margin and line length calibrations, get information aboutprinter settings and status, control your printer’s spooling feature,download PostScript files to the printer, and change some printerdefault settings (fig. 3.9).

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-25

Fig. 3.9 General Menu Options

Printer StatusThis option provides on screen information about the printer’s currentstatus. For example, the status may indicate that the printer is idle, readyto receive a job. If the printer is receiving data, the status message liststhe interface source; if the printer is processing a job, the status messagelists the user name, document name, and interface source.

Printer InformationThis option allows you to send information about the printer’scurrent settings to the screen or the printer. The list includesinformation about the printer configuration, the storage devices onthe printer, and the network configuration.

SpoolingThis option allows you to enable and control spooling on theprinter’s hard drive. Spooling frees up the communication channelbetween your Macintosh and printer which permits your computer toreturn to other processing quickly. Spooling can be enabled for eachinterface independently using this menu or the Interface menus onthe printer’s front panel. See “The Spooler” later in this chapter.

Margin AdjustmentThis option allows you to adjust the printer margin. Printer marginrefers to the imageable area, not to margin settings for a document inan application. The imageable area is the portion of a page on whichthe printer can lay down toner. The Margin Adjustment allows youto adjust the position of this imageable area. See “Printer MarginAdjustment” later in this chapter.

3-26 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

X•ACT CalibrationThis option allows you to calibrate the horizontal and verticaldimensions of your printer’s output to a standard. See “AccurateCalibration Technology” later in this chapter for details about usingXANTÉ’s patent pending X•ACT feature.

Download PostScript FileThis option allows you to download PostScript files to your printer.

Test DirectoryThis option allows you to store files on the Accel-a-Graphix CT4’shard disk for access from the front panel. This function is not validfor laser printers.

Reboot PrinterThis option allows you to reboot the printer from your computer. Thisoption causes the printer to go through the initialization process.

Startup PageThis option allows you to enable or disable the page that printsautomatically after your printer goes through the initializationprocess. The Print One option allows you to print a start-up pageregardless of whether the feature is enabled. The factory default is toprint the start-up page after initialization.

This feature can also be controlled from the Startup Page menu onthe printer’s front panel or by downloading the STARTPG.ON andSTARTPG.OFF files. See “Downloads Folder” earlier in this chapterand chapter 5, “Configuration,” for details.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-27

The Networking Menu

This menu allows you to configure your printer’s optional Ethernetinterface for Novell Print Server emulation, AppleTalk, and theTCP/IP communication (fig. 3.10). These options should only beused by your Network Administrator. See the Ethernet Upgrademanual that is shipped with the upgrade package.

Fig 3.10 Networking Menu Options

Novell Print ServerThe following options in this menu allow you to configure the NovellPrint Server emulation on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface.

• Login & Printing—allows you to enable your printer to login toand accept print jobs from a designated Novell file server.

• File Server—allows you to specify up to four Novell file serversfor your printer to poll for print jobs.

• Print Server Name—allows you to specify the name your printerwill use to login to the Novell file server(s).

• Set Print Server Password—allows you to specify the passwordrequired for your printer to login to the Novell file server(s).

• Network Protocol—allows you to configure the Novell Print Serveremulation for the protocol used on your network. The Novell PrintServer menu on the printer’s front panel is another method to set thenetwork protocol. See chapter 5, “Configuration.”

3-28 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

AppleTalkThe following options in this menu allow you to configure theAppleTalk protocol on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface.

• Printer Name—allows you to set the name your printeradvertises on the network.

• EtherTalk Zone Name—allows you to change the default zoneassigned to your printer by the network router. This optionshould only be used by (or at the direction of) your NetworkAdministrator. See the Ethernet Upgrade manual that is shippedwith the upgrade package for instructions.

TCP/IPThe following options in this menu allow you to enable the TCP/IPprotocol and set the TCP/IP address on your printer’s optionalEthernet interface.

• Address—allows you to change your printer’s default TCP/IPaddress to one that agrees with the TCP/IP addressing system onyour network.

• LPR Enable—allows you to enable or disable the Line Printerprotocol on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface. The LinePrinter menu on the printer’s front panel is another method toenable or disable LPR. See chapter 5, “Configuration.”

The Color Menu

The Color menu allows you to create custom gamma curves tocalibrate your printer’s grayscale output for specific ink, media, andenvironmental conditions (fig. 3.11). Two of the three Color menuoptions, Transfer Curve and CRD Directories, are for use only withXANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.

Fig. 3.11 Color Menu Options

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-29

Transfer CurveThis menu allows you to create and control calibration curves for upto four printers controller by the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. This functionis not valid for laser printers.

CRD DirectoriesThis menu allows you to manage the CRD library on theAccel-a-Graphix CT4’s hard drive. This function is not valid forlaser printers.

LinearizeThis menu allows you to create and download custom curves to yourprinter. These curves can be selected for a specific job from the Printdialog box or set as the default from the printer’s front panel. See“Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter.

XANTÉ LinearizerXANTÉ Linearizer allows you to create a file that adjusts yourprinter’s grayscale output to a linear standard using densitometermeasurements. This file is downloaded to the printer as a customgamma curve using XANTÉ Command Center. See “Calibrationwith a Densitometer” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.

Fig. 3.12 XANTÉ Linearizer Menu

3-30 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Adobe DownloaderUse Adobe Downloader to load and manage font files on yourprinter’s hard drive and to send PostScript files to your printer.

Fig. 3.13 Adobe Downloader Menu

The File Menu

The file menu allows you to download fonts and PostScript files tothe printer and to quit Adobe Downloader.

Download FontsThis menu allows you to download fonts to an optional hard disk onyour printer or to printer memory. Fonts downloaded to your printerare considered resident, which means applications do not have tobundle these fonts with print jobs. Fonts downloaded to printermemory only remain during the current power cycle. Fontsdownloaded to an optional hard disk survive a power cycle. See“Downloaded Fonts” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.

Download PostScript FileThis option allows you to select a PostScript file on your Macintoshand send it to the printer. XANTÉ Command Center also providesthis option under the General menu.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-31

The Special Menu

The Special menu allows you to check printer status and manage fontsdownloaded to your printer.

Printer StatusThis option allows you to check the current status of the printer. Thisoption is also available using the Printer Status option of the Generalmenu in XANTÉ Command Center.

Printer Font DirectoryThe Printer Font Directory option provides access to the fontsdownloaded to the printer. Using this menu, you can print a list orview on screen all fonts downloaded to printer ROM, memory, or anoptional hard disk. The Delete option of this menu allows you toremove fonts that have been downloaded to memory or the optionalhard disk. You cannot remove fonts from ROM. See “DownloadedFonts” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.

Other Special Menu OptionsWe recommend that you use the Reboot Printer option of the Generalmenu in XANTÉ Command Center instead of the Clear Font Cacheor Restart Printer options in the Special menu. See the PostScriptReference Language Manual for information about using the UseDifferent Password option.

ProceduresThis section provides detailed instructions for performing commonprocedures using the programs provided in the XANTÉ Utilities.

3-32 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

The Spooler

Spooling can be enabled for each interface independently throughXANTÉ Command Center or the Interface menus on the printer’sfront panel. XANTÉ Command Center also allows you to managethe jobs in the spooler print queue. See chapter 8, “AdvancedFeatures,” for additional information.

Using the Front PanelThe Spooler can be enabled using the Spooler menu of the interfacethat you will be using (see chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additionalinformation).

1. Select the Interface (SETUP:INTERFACES) menu.

2. Select the printer interface (SERIAL, PARALLEL,ETHERTALK, LPR, or NOVELL PSERVER) that you use tosend files.

3. Select the Spool menu.

4. Select the YES option.

5. Press the On Line key to return the printer to theREADY/IDLE state.

Using XANTÉ Command CenterThis option allows you to enable and control spooling on theprinter’s hard drive.

To Enable the Spooler

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooling from theGeneral menu to open the Spooling window (fig. 3.14).

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-33

Fig 3.14 The Spooling Window

2. Select Devices from the Configure box to open the SelectSpool Device window (fig. 3.15).

Fig. 3.15 The Select Spool Device Window

3. Select the disk to use to store the spooled jobs or select NONEto disable spooling; then click Ok. The spool device is set up;then the Spooling Window reappears (fig. 3.14).

3-34 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

4. Select Interfaces from the Configure box to open the Select I/OInterfaces to Spool window (fig. 3.16).

Fig. 3.16 The Select I/O Interfaces to Spool Window

5. Select the interface that you use to send files to the printer;then click Ok. The I/O interface is set up; then the Spoolingwindow reappears (fig. 3.14).

6. Click Ok to close the Spooling Window; then select Quit fromthe File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.

To manage jobs in the spooler’s job queueThe spooler’s job queue can store up to 250 jobs. Jobs sent with theSave Spooled Job option set to True in the Print dialog box areretained indefinitely in the queue (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”). Asaved job can be reprinted quickly from the Spooling menu withoutreprocessing the file through an application.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooling from theGeneral menu to open the Spooling window (fig. 3.17).

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-35

Fig 3.17 The Job Queue in the Spooling Window

The Job queue lists the job ID, job status, job title, spooldevice, and file size of all jobs in the spooling queue. Jobstatus can be W (waiting to be processed), P (currentlyprocessing), or H (already processed and held using the SaveSpooled Job feature).

2. Use the Control buttons to manage the jobs in the queue.

Print Prints the highlighted job (used to print savedjobs)

Delete Deletes the highlighted job

Delete All Deletes all jobs in the queue

Move to Front Moves the highlighted job to the front of thequeue

Refresh Updates the screen with the current job queue

3. Click Ok to close the Spooling window; then select Quit fromthe File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.

3-36 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Calibration with a Densitometer

You can create up to seven custom gamma curves and download theseto your printer, in addition to the seven standard curves supplied withXANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technology. The Linear option on theprinter’s front panel Gamma menu allows you to select Custom Gamma0 as your printer’s default. The Gamma PPD option in the Print dialogbox allows you to select any of the custom gamma curves or any of thestandard gamma curves on a job by job basis (see “The Gamma Menu”in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and “Halftone CalibrationTechnology” in chapter 8 for details).

Custom curves can be used to adjust your printer’s performance toeliminate inconsistencies due to equipment age, different inks andmedia, and environmental conditions. These curves are created usingXANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and adensitometer using the following steps:

• Printing a Calibration Strip

• Using the Densitometer

• Linearizing the Densitometer Data

• Creating a Custom Gamma Curve

Printing a Calibration StripThe first step in calibrating your printer is to print a calibration stripto measure the printer’s current performance as a basis for thecalibration.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Linearize from theColor menu to open the Linearization window (fig. 3.18).

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-37

Fig. 3.18 The Linearization Window

2. Set the Number of Patches to print. The default setting of 11prints a calibration strip with levels of gray at 10% increments.

3. Click Print Calibration Strip (fig. 3.18). The calibration stripshows the printer’s performance using no gamma curvecorrection.

4. Click Ok to close the Linearization window; then select Quitfrom the File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.

Using the DensitometerA densitometer uses a standard light source to measure the amount oflight reflected from printer output. This measurement is compared toa standard and expressed as a percentage of gray.

The densitometer, like any other precision instrument, must becalibrated before each use. After calibrating the densitometer, use itto get density measurements for the calibration strip you printed.Refer to the documentation of the model you are using forinstructions on calibrating and using the densitometer.

Note: Make sure that the densitometer reads measurements for dotarea, not dot density. For instructions on changing thissetting, refer to the densitometer’s documentation.

3-38 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Linearizing the Densitometer DataThe XANTÉ Linearizer uses the densitometer measurements tocalculate the adjustments necessary to correct printer performance toa linear standard.

1. Open XANTÉ Linearizer and choose Select Device from theDevice menu. The following window appears.

Fig. 3.19 The Select Device Window

2. Select Generic B&W from the Select Device drop-down menu(fig. 3.19), and click Ok. You return to the Linearizer main menu.

3. Select Linearize from the Device Menu. The main window forGeneric B&W appears (fig. 3.20).

Fig. 3.20 The Device Main Window

4. Enter the measurements from the densitometer next to thecorresponding percentages in the Enter Coverage Values section.

5. Click Graph to display a curve of your printer’s performanceand the standard linear curve.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-39

6. Click Save As. Specify a file name, select a folder on yoursystem, and click Save to save the file.

7. Click Ok to close the Device window; then select Quit fromthe File menu to exit the XANTÉ Linearizer.

Creating a Custom Gamma CurveUse XANTÉ Command Center to create and automatically downloada custom gamma curve by merging the Linearization file you createdwith a custom gamma curve on your printer. The new custom curveadjusts your printer’s performance to a linear standard for thespecific conditions (ink, media, and environment) at the time youprinted the calibration strip.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Linearize from theColor menu to open the Linearization window (fig. 3.21).

Fig. 3.21 The Linearization Window

2. Select Load (fig. 3.21) to open a file list window.

3. Locate and highlight the file you created in the Linearizer; clickOpen to select the file and return to the Linearization window.

4. Select the custom gamma curve to update on the printer fromthe Update Transfer Curve list (fig. 3.21).

3-40 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

5. Click Linearize to create a new curve and download it to yourprinter. The new curve replaces the existing curve of the samename on the printer.

6. Print another calibration strip and measure it with theDensitometer to verify the accuracy of the curve you created.If the measured densities differ from the standards by morethan 3%, repeat the calibration process.

7. Click Ok to close the Linearization window; then select Quitfrom the File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.

Note: To reset a custom gamma curve to the factory default (acopy of the standard Gamma 0 curve), highlight the curve inthe Update Transfer Curve list and click Reset.

Accurate Calibration Technology

This option allows you to calibrate printed line lengths using XANTÉ’spatent pending X•ACT feature. Your printer is calibrated before it isshipped, but it may drift out of alignment over time. After using X•ACTto calibrate the line lengths, always adjust the alignment of theimageable area using the Margin Alignment option in XANTÉCommand Center.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select X•ACTCalibration from the General menu to open the X•ACTCalibration window (fig. 3.22).

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-41

Fig. 3.22 X•ACT Screen

2. Select the media size you are using in the Paper Size box.

3. Click Update/Print. A test page prints with a horizontal and avertical line on it.

4. Turn the test page so that the large and small crosses arealigned with one another as they are on the X•ACTCalibration screen (fig. 3.22).

5. Measure the horizontal line. Adjust the horizontal slide bar onthe X•ACT screen (fig. 3.22) until the number beneath thehorizontal slide bar equals the measured length of the line.

6. Measure the vertical line. Adjust the vertical slide bar on theX•ACT screen (fig. 3.22) until the number above the verticalslide bar equals the measured length of the line.

7. Click Update/Print. When the new page prints, measure thelines. They should be the correct lengths. If not, repeat steps 5,6, and 7 until the measurements are correct.

8. Click Close to return to the Command Center main menu; thenadjust the printer margins using the following procedure.

3-42 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Printer Margin Adjustment

The Margin Adjustment option allows you to adjust the position ofthe imageable area. Your printer is calibrated before it is shipped, butit may drift out of alignment over time. Always adjust the position ofthe imageable area on the page after using X•ACT Calibration.

Note: Use the standard paper size (letter or A4) for your papercassette with the Margin Adjustment function.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center, if necessary, and selectMargin Adjustment from the General menu. The PrinterMargin Control screen appears.

Fig. 3.23 Printer Margin Control Screen

2. Select Standard to use 1/32 inch units or Metric for 1 mmunits for adjustments.

3. Select Set & Print, then click Send to Printer. Click Ok in thewarning dialog box (fig. 3.24). An alignment test page prints.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-43

Fig. 3.24 Margin Alignment Warning

4. Turn the test page so that -x is to the left and -y is at the topof the crossed lines.

5. Check the current settings that printed near the crossed lines.The factory default is x = 0, y = 0, which should cause eachline to print 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the page.

The coordinates listed on the alignment test page are anindication of the change from the factory default in dots perinch. Because these measurements are rounded for display,adjustments should be based on careful measurements, not theprinted coordinates.

Note: If the current settings are not the factory defaults andyou must make adjustments to the coordinates, it maybe easier to reset the coordinates to the factory defaultbefore beginning. To do this, select Factory Default;click Send to Printer; then, click Ok in the warningdialog box. Print another alignment test page (steps 2and 3) using the factory defaults.

6. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -x line.This distance is dependent on the y coordinate.

• To move the -x line away from the edge of the page, movethe slide on the vertical slide bar up (toward the -y).

• To move the -x line closer to the edge of the page, movethe slide on the vertical slide bar down (toward the +y).

• The distance moved (in the units you selected in step 2) isdisplayed to the right of ∆y.

3-44 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

7. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -y line.This distance is dependent on the x coordinate.

• To move the -y line away from the edge of the page, movethe slide on the horizontal slide bar to the left (toward the-x).

• To move the -y line closer to the edge of the page, movethe slide on the horizontal slide bar to the right (toward the+x).

• The distance moved (in the units you selected in step 2) isdisplayed to the right of ∆x.

8. Print another alignment page (see step 3).

9. Measure the -x and -y lines on the new test page. If the linesare not each 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the paper, go backto step 5 and repeat the process.

10. When the -x and -y lines are correctly set, click Close. Then,select Quit from the File menu to exit Command Center.

Downloaded Fonts

Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident, whichmeans applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs.You can download fonts to your printer’s hard disk or memory.Fonts downloaded to printer memory only remain during the currentpower cycle. Fonts downloaded to an optional hard disk survive apower cycle.

Caution: Fonts downloaded to memory may cause PostScripterrors to occur due to insufficient memory. To resolvethis, download the fonts to the printer’s optional harddisk or increase the memory in the printer.

Downloading Fonts

1. Open the Adobe Downloader and select Download Fonts fromthe File menu to bring up the following screen.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-45

Fonts

AmeriAmeriBolAmeriExtBolAmeriItaAvantGarBooAvantGarBooOblAvantGarDemAvantGarDemOblBenguBolBenguBooBodonBodonBolBodonBolItaBodonPosBookmDem

Eject

Outline Fonts Available:

AmeriAmeriBol

Desktop

Add

Add All

Remove

Cancel

Download

Outline Fonts Selected:

Macinto...

MemoryDevice

Fig. 3.25 Download Font Screen

2. Select the folder on your Macintosh that contains the font filesfrom the drop down menu on the top left of the screen. Thelarge box on the left of the screen displays the fonts in theselected folder.

3. Select Memory or Disk from the Device menu as thedestination for the downloaded fonts.

Note: If more than one optional hard disk is attached to yourprinter, select the target disk from the drop-down menu.

4. Highlight a single font in the list on the left and click Add or clickAdd All to select all of the fonts in the open folder. The selectedfont(s) will appear in the list on the right of the screen (fig. 3.25).

Note: To remove fonts from the selected list (on the right of thescreen), highlight the fonts and click Remove.

5. Click Download to send the selected fonts to the printer.

6. After the download is complete, select Quit from the File menuto close the Adobe Downloader.

3-46 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Reviewing and Removing Downloaded Fonts

1. Open the Adobe Downloader and select Printer Font Directoryfrom the Special menu. The following screen appears.

Where would you like the directory sent?

CancelOK

Screen

Printer

Fig. 3.26 Listing Downloaded Fonts

2. Choose Printer to print a list of all fonts in printer memory,ROM, cartridge ROM, and on hard disks (fig. 3.26), or chooseScreen to bring up the Font Directory screen (fig. 3.27).

Fig 3.27 The Font Directory Screen

3. Select the font storage area from the Device menu to view thefonts present in that area.

4. To remove a font from printer memory or a hard disk,highlight the font and click Delete.

_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-47

5. Click OK to close the Font Directory Screen and return to theAdobe Downloader main menu.

Note: To remove fonts downloaded to printer memory, turn theprinter off. Fonts are stored in printer memory only duringthe current power cycle.

◊ ◊ ◊

3-48 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-1

Chapter 4 - PC Setup

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................4-3Before You Begin ............................................................................4-3XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC) ....................................................4-3XANTÉ Utilities Installer ...............................................................4-6

XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers ............................... 4-6Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ..............................................................4-7Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ....................................................4-8

Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers .....................................4-8Windows 95 Drivers ...............................................................4-16Windows NT Drivers ..............................................................4-23Configuring the Printer ...........................................................4-28

PDFs Folder ..................................................................................4-28PS_Files Folder ............................................................................. 4-29XANTÉ Command Center ............................................................4-31

Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center ........................4-31The Options Menu .................................................................. 4-32The Controller Menu ..............................................................4-32The Ports Menu ......................................................................4-38

The XANTÉ Linearization Tool ...................................................4-38Procedures .....................................................................................4-39

The Spooler ............................................................................4-39Calibration with a Densitometer .............................................4-43Accurate Calibration Technology ........................................... 4-47Printer Margin Adjustment ..................................................... 4-49Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk ............................4-51

4-2 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Notes

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes the contents and use of the XANTÉ UtilitiesCD-ROM for the PC. This includes instructions for installing andconfiguring the Adobe PostScript printer driver, your printer’s PPD(PostScript Printer Description) file, XANTÉ Command Center, theXANTÉ Linearization Tool, and other utility files. The proceduressection contains instructions for using some of your printer’sinnovative features.

Before You BeginYou should be familiar with standard PC and Windows proceduressuch as choosing commands, selecting options, using buttons andboxes, locating files, and scrolling. If you have questions on any ofthese procedures, see your DOS, Windows, and mousedocumentation.

XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC)The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, shipped with your printer, includesAdobe PostScript printer drivers, PPDs, XANTÉ Utilities, PostScriptfiles, and other programs to help you setup, customize, and troubleshootyour printer. This section briefly describes the main folders in the PCsection of the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.

4-4 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

The Acrobat folder contains Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 installationprograms for Windows 3.1 and Windows 95. See “Adobe AcrobatReader 3.0” later in this chapter and the Read1st.txt file on the CD-ROM for installation instructions.

The AG_CT4 folder contains CRDs and default curves for use withXANTÉ’s Accel-a-Graphix CT4.

The ATM folder contains an installation program for Adobe TypeManager and the expanded font set for use with Adobe PostScript 3. ForWindows 3.1, run the Install.exe in the ATM302 folder. For Windows95, run the Install.exe in either the ATM302 or ATM40 folder. ForWindows NT 4.0, run the Setup.exe in the ATM40_NT folder.

The Drivers folder contains Adobe PostScript drivers and installationprograms for Roman and Kanji font printers.

The XANTÉ Utilities Installer launches the installation program for themost recent version of the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for youroperating system. If you cannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer or ifyou prefer to use the earlier Adobe PostScript Printer Driver, these filescan be loaded individually. See the Readme.PDF file on the CD-ROM,“XANTÉ Utilities Installer,” and “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers”later in this chapter.

The Manuals folder contains PDF files of the current versions of themanuals for XANTÉ printers. These manuals can be viewed on screenor printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0.

The PDFs folder contains printer drivers required by QuarkXPress. See“XANTÉ Utilities Installer” and “PDFs Folder” later in this chapter.

The PPDs folder contains XANTÉ PPDs for Roman and Kanji fontprinters. See the Readme.PDF file on the CD-ROM and “AdobePostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter.

The Ps_files folder contains PostScript files that can be downloaded toyour printer using XANTÉ Command Center. See the Overview.PDFfile in the Ps_files folder on the CD-ROM and “Ps_files Folder” later inthis chapter.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-5

The Xinstall folder contains the XANTÉ Utilities Installer for the PC.This program installs XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉLinearization Tool, the PDF (Printer Description File) for QuarkXPress(if selected), and the PPD for PageMaker (if selected); then, it launchesthe appropriate Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installation program foryour operating system. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer” later in thischapter.

The Xutils folder contains XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉLinearization Tool, and a Read1st.PDF file that describes the manualinstallation and setup of the Utilities. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer”and the individual utility sections later in this chapter for additionalinformation.

The Instread.txt describes the XANTÉ Utilities Installer and providesinformation about its use and about Adobe Acrobat 3.0 and the AdobeType Manager. This file is displayed by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer.

The Read1st.txt describes the XANTÉ Utilities Installer and how to useit and the Adobe Acrobat 3.0 Installer.

The Readme.PDF file provides an overview of the XANTÉ Utilitiesfor the PC and describes how to install Adobe PostScript Printer Driversif you do not use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. This file can be openedusing Acrobat Reader 3.0.

The Xantent file is used by the Adobe PostScript printer driverinstallation for Windows NT 3.5x.

Always check the Readme files on the CD-ROM for information thatwas not available at the time this manual was printed.

4-6 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

XANTÉ Utilities InstallerThe XANTÉ Utilities Installer installs XANTÉ Command Center, theXANTÉ Linearization Tool, and your printer’s QuarkXPress PDF; then,it launches the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installer. On systemsrunning Windows 3.1/3.11, the installer for the most recent printerdriver is launched. On systems running Windows 95, you can selectwhich printer driver to install. See “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers”later in this chapter for additional information.

The XANTÉ Utilities Installer runs properly only on an Intel basedcomputer running Windows 3.1/3.11, Windows 95, or Windows NT. Ifthis installation program does not execute properly or if you prefer toload the files manually, see the Readme.PDF on the CD-ROM and“Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter to load thosedrivers manually and “PDFs Folder” later in this chapter to loadQuarkXPress PDFs manually. To install XANTÉ Command Center andthe XANTÉ Linearization Tool without using the XANTÉ UtilitiesInstaller, run the Setup.exe file in the Xutils folder on the CD-ROM.

XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. TheXANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically onsystems running Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0. To startthe Installer manually

a. Select Run from the File menu (Windows 3.1) or fromthe Start menu (Windows 95).

b. Use the Browse function to select the Setup.exe file(Windows 3.1) or the Xinstall.exe file (Windows 95,Windows NT 3.5x and 4.0) on the CD-ROM; then clickOK.

2. Follow the instructions on each screen before clicking Next tocontinue the configuration. To exit the installation programwithout installing any files, click Cancel; then, click Exit Setup.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-7

Note: You can select only one Application PDF or PPD andonly one printer per installation process.

3. Review the configuration information on the Start CopyingFiles screen before clicking Next to install the XANTÉUtilities, the QuarkXPress PDF (if selected), and the PPD forPageMaker (if selected). The QuarkXPress PDF and the PPDfor PageMaker are copied into the default directories for theapplication version or into the directory you specified in thesetup.

4. After these files are installed, the Adobe PostScript Installer islaunched. Go to the appropriate section for your operatingsystem in “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” to continue theinstallation.

Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0The documentation on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM is in theAdobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). You can installAdobe Acrobat Reader 3. from the CD-ROM. Windows NT 3.5xusers should install the Windows 3.1 version, and Windows NT 4.0users should install the Windows 95 version.

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. Onsystems running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0, theXANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically. ClickCancel; then, click Exit Setup to quit the automatic installationprogram.

2. Select Run from the File menu (Windows 3.1) or from theStart menu (Windows 95), and use the Browse function toselect the Ar.exe file (Acrobat: Win31: Ar.exe or Acrobat:Win95: Ar.exe) on the CD-ROM; then click OK.

4-8 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

3. Follow the instructions on each screen to complete theinstallation.

4. See the Read1st.txt file on the CD-ROM and the AdobeAcrobat 3.0 Readme file that is installed with the program onyour system.

Adobe PostScript Printer DriversYour XANTÉ printer features Adobe PostScript software. Beforeusing your printer, you must install the Adobe PostScript driver andyour printer’s PPD.

The XANTÉ Utilities Installer launches the installation program forthe most recent Adobe PostScript printer driver on systems runningWindows 3.1/3.11. It allows you to select the Adobe PostScriptprinter driver to load on systems running Windows 95. This sectiondescribes how to load the printer driver manually and using theXANTÉ Utilities Installer. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer” earlier inthis chapter to load XANTÉ Utilities manually. See “PDFs Folder“later in this chapter to load QuarkXPress PDF files manually.

Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers

The AdobePS 3.0 driver supports Adobe PostScript Level 2; theAdobePS 3.1 driver supports Adobe PostScript 3. This sectiondescribes how to install and configure the printer driver and yourprinter’s PPD.

Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver

1. The installation program for the most recent Adobe PostScriptprinter driver is launched by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. If youcannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer or if you prefer to use theearlier Adobe PostScript printer driver, use the following procedureto launch the installation program for the driver.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-9

a. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC.

b. Start Windows; then, close all Windows applications andspooling programs.

c. Use File Manager to open the appropriate languagefolder in the Drivers: Win31: Ps30 or Ps31 folder on theCD-ROM and check the Readme file for updates beforebeginning the installation.

d. Double-click the Setup.exe icon in the Ps30 or Ps31folder on the CD-ROM to begin the installation.

e. Go to step 2 (AdobePS 3.1) or step 3 (AdobePS 3.0) tocontinue the installation.

2. Read the license agreement and click Accept to continue theAdobePS 3.1 installation. If you click Decline, the installationprogram terminates.

3. Click Read to view the Readme file. When you close theReadme file (or if you selected Skip instead of Read on theREADME.WRI screen), the PostScript Printer Driver Setupscreen appears (fig. 4.1).

Fig. 4.1 The PostScript Printer Driver Setup Screen

4-10 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

4. Click Continue in the message box to load the AdobePSprinter driver on your system. If all Windows applications arenot closed, or if you do not want to overwrite existing AdobePostScript drivers, click Exit to terminate the installation.

5. Click Restart Windows when the installation is complete. Afterrestarting, continue the setup by installing the PPD.

Installing your Printer’s PPD

1. After loading the AdobePS printer driver and restartingWindows, the Install PostScript Printer from PPD window mayappear (fig. 4.2). To open the window manually, double-clickthe Adobe PostScript Printer icon (Red icon with the Adobelogo) in the Control Panel window of the Main group.

Fig. 4.2 The Install PostScript Printer from PPD Dialog Box

2. Access the drive containing the CD-ROM and select the PPDs:Level3: Win31 directory, if installing AdobePS 3.1, or thePPDs: Level2: Win31 directory, if installing AdobePS 3.0.Highlight your XANTÉ printer from the Printer DescriptionsAvailable box (fig. 4.2), and click Install.

3. Click OK in the successful installation dialog box.

4. Click Close in the Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box;then click OK in the message box to return to the Control Panelwindow. After installing the PPD, continue the setup byconfiguring the PPD for the Windows 3.1/3.11 environment.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-11

Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11After loading the AdobePS printer driver and the PPD, configure thenew printer as the default for Windows 3.1 applications.

1. Double-click Printers (not PostScript Printers) in the ControlPanel window. The Printers dialog box appears.

Fig. 4.3 The Printers Dialog Box

2. Highlight your XANTÉ printer in the Installed Printers boxand click Set as Default Printer.

3. Click Connect to set the Windows printing parameters.

Fig. 4.4 The Connect Dialog Box

a. Under Ports, select the port to which your printer isconnected.

4-12 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

b. Under Timeouts (seconds), make sure the settings are

Device Not Selected: 300 secondsTransmission Retry: 900 seconds

c. Select the Fast Printing Direct to Port option, if you havea Pentium PC. If not, be sure this option is not selected.

d. Click OK to return to the Printers dialog box (fig. 4.3).

4. Click Setup to define the printer and PostScript options.

5. Click the PostScript Tab to set PostScript parameters.

Fig. 4.5 The PostScript Tab Screen

a. Under Performance Options, select Use Language Level2 or 3 Features and make sure Send Data in Binary is notselected.

b. Under Margins, select Default.

c. Under Color Options, select Send Full Color Data.

d. Under Protocol Options, select Default-Serial/Parallel

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-13

e. Under PostScript Timeout Values, make sure settings are

Job Timeout - Seconds, set to 0Wait Timeout-Seconds, set to 240

f. Under PostScript Performance, select Optimize forPortability.

6. Click the Features Tab to configure your printer options. Usethe scroll bar on the left to locate the option and the scroll baron the right of each option to select the setting.

Fig. 4.6 The Features Tab Screen

a. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on yourprinter in the InstalledMemory menu.

b. Select Installed for the upgrades that are installed on yourprinter, such as optional trays, the extra wide print upgrade,and the optional duplexer (Accel-a-Writer 8300 only).

4-14 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

c. Select True for Spooler Enabled to enable the SaveSpooled Job menu in your application Print dialog box.

Note: This does not enable the Spooler feature on yourprinter. The Spooler must be enabled on theprinter, using either the front panel Interfacesmenus (see chapter 5) or XANTÉ CommandCenter (see “The Spooler” later in this chapter) forthe Save Spooled Job feature to function properly.

d. Select the defaults to be used in your application Printdialog box for the remaining printer features. See chapter6, “PPD Settings,” for a description of these menus.

7. Click the Job Control Tab to configure print job defaults.

Fig. 4.7 The Job Control Tab Screen

a. Under Error Handler, select Send Error Handler witheach job.

b. Under PostScript Header, select Download Each Job.

8. Click OK to exit the Setup dialog box.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-15

9. Click Close in the Printers dialog box; then close the ControlPanel window. After installing and configuring the AdobePSprinter driver and PPD, see “Configuring the Printer” later inthis chapter to verify that the printer interfaces are properlyconfigured.

Deleting Previous Driver VersionsNormally, you do not have to delete previous versions of the AdobePostScript printer driver for Windows or any previously installedAdobe PostScript printers. However, if you suspect installationproblems, first remove your installed printers from the Printersdialog box in the Windows Control Panel and reinstall them via theAdobe PostScript Printers dialog box which is also in the WindowsControl panel.

If after removing and reinstalling your printers, you still experienceproblems, delete all previous driver versions and reinstall yourprinters using the Adobe PostScript Printers dialog box.

To delete a previous version of the driver

1. Exit Windows and go to DOS.

2. Delete the following files from both your Windows andWindows: System directories.

Note: Your configuration may not include all these files, butyou need to delete the ones that are there.

*.EBF*.PPB*.PPD*.PFM (delete the *.PFM files only if you did not place them

here using the ATM control panel or a fontinstallation program)

ADOBEPS?.*RUN_ENUM.*PSINSTDV.EXEWINDOWN.EXEPS_ENUM.*DOWN.DLLDWN.HLP

4-16 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

3. Restart Windows.

4. Use Notepad or another ASCII text editor to delete thefollowing entries from the Win.ini file in the Windowsdirectory. Only delete the lines indicated by notes in the rightcolumn; the other lines are to help you locate the entries

[<printer_name>,<port>] <<<Delete this linePrinterName=<printer_nickname> <<<Delete this line

[devices]<printer-name>=ADOBEPS,<port> <<<Delete this line

[PrinterPorts]<printer_name>=ADOBEPS,<port>,15,45,… <<<Delete this line

If the device= line in the [windows] section of the Win.ini file refersto AdobePS, delete that line also.

Windows 95 Drivers

The AdobePS 4.1 driver supports Adobe PostScript Level 2; theAdobePS 4.22 driver supports Adobe PostScript 3 and earlier. Thissection describes how to install and configure these drivers withoutusing the XANTÉ Utilities Installer.

Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD

1. The installation program for the selected Adobe PostScriptprinter driver is launched by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. If youcannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer, use the followingprocedure to launch the installation program for the driver.

a. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. TheXANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically.Click Cancel; then, click Exit Setup to quit the automaticinstallation program.

b. Start Windows 95; then, close all Windows applicationsand spooling programs.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-17

c. Use Windows Explorer to open the appropriate languagefolder in the Drivers: Win95: Ps41 or Ps422 folder onthe CD-ROM and check the Readme file for updatesbefore beginning the installation.

d. Double-click the Setup.exe icon in the Ps41 or Ps422folder on the CD-ROM to begin the installation.

e. Go to step 2 (AdobePS 4.2) or step 3 (AdobePS 4.1) tocontinue the installation.

Note: If you are installing AdobePS 4.1, select your PPDfrom the PPDs: Level2: Win95 folder on the CD-ROM.

2. Read the license agreement and click Accept to continue theAdobePS 4.2 installation. If you click Decline, the installationprogram terminates.

Fig. 4.8 The AdobePS Printer Driver Setup Dialog Box

3. Click Read to view the Readme file. When you close theReadme file, click Next in the setup screen to continue theinstallation (fig. 4.8).

4-18 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

4. Select Yes to copy the setup program to your hard drive(recommended); then click Next.

Note: If you select No and click Next, skip to step 5 after theAdobePS printer driver files are loaded.

5. Click Next to copy the AdobePS printer driver files and setupprogram to the default directory on your PC.

6. Select Local, click Next, and skip to step 7 if the printer isconnected to your PC through the serial or parallel port. SelectNetwork, click Next, and go to step 6 if the printer isconnected to a network.

7. Use the Browse function or type the network path or queuename in the Network Path screen; then click Next to bring upthe Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box (fig. 4.9) .Check with your system administrator if you have questionsabout the correct network information.

8. Access the drive containing the CD-ROM and select the PPDs:Level3: Win95 folder in the PPDs folder, if installing theAdobePS 4.2, or PPDs: Level2: Win95, if installing AdobePS4.1. Select your XANTÉ printer from the list of printers andclick Next (fig. 4.9). Go to step 9 for a local printer or to step10 for a networked printer.

Fig. 4.9 Select the XANTÉ PPD

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-19

9. Select the port through which your PC is connected to theprinter from the Available Ports box; then click Next.

Note: You can view or change the port configuration fromthe Local Port Selection screen by clicking theConfigure Port button. See your system administratorfor information.

10. Set the following options in the Add Printer dialog box; thenclick Next.

Fig. 4.10 The Add Printer Dialog Box

a. Use the default printer name or type in a name youprefer.

b. Check Yes to set the printer as the default for Windows95 applications.

c. Select Yes to print a test page or No to skip the test pageprint.

11. Click OK to close the Printer Properties window. Then exit theAdobePS printer driver installation program and the XANTÉUtilities Installer. After installing the AdobePS printer driverand the PPD, continue the setup by configuring the PPD forthe Windows 95 environment.

4-20 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Configuring the PPD for Windows 95After installing the Adobe PostScript printer driver and PPD,configure the PPD for your printer.

1. Click Start from the Windows 95 desktop; then click Settings;then click Printers. The Printers window appears.

2. Highlight your XANTÉ printer model and click the rightmouse button. Click Properties from the drop-down menu.

3. Click the Device Options tab to configure your printer options.Use the scroll bar in the Printer Features and InstallableOptions sections to locate and highlight the options; then,select the setting from the appropriate Change Setting for box.

Fig. 4.11 The Device Options Tab for Printer Properties

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-21

a. Select the defaults for the Properties menu in yourapplication Print dialog box from the Printer featuressection. See chapter 6, “PPD Settings,” for a descriptionof these menus.

b. Select Installed for the upgrades that are installed onyour printer, such as optional trays, the extra wide printupgrade, and the optional duplexer (Accel-a-Writer 8300only).

c. Select True for Spooler Enabled to enable the SaveSpooled Job menu in your application Print dialog box.

Note: This does not enable the Spooler feature on yourprinter. The Spooler must be enabled on theprinter, using either the front panel Interfacesmenus (see chapter 5) or XANTÉ CommandCenter (see “The Spooler” later in this chapter) forthe Save Spooled Job feature to function properly.

d. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on yourprinter using the VMOption menu.

4. Click the Graphics tab and set the printer’s default resolution.

5. Click the Details tab and make the following changes for a localprinter. These options are not available for a networked printer.

a. Under Timeout, make sure the settings are

Not Selected: 300Transmission Retry: 900

b. Click Spool Setting and select the following options;then click OK to close the Spool Settings Window.

Spool Data Format: RAWDisable bidirectional support for this printer (selected)

6. Click the PostScript tab.

4-22 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.12 The PostScript Tab for Printer Properties

a. In the PostScript output format box, select PostScript(optimized for speed) if you have a Pentium processor. Ifnot, select PostScript (optimized for portability-ADSC).

b. Under PostScript header, select Download header witheach print job.

c. Under PostScript timeout values, make sure the setting are

Job timeout: 0Wait timeout: 240

7. To print a test page, click the General tab; then click Print TestPage.

8. Click OK to close the Printer Properties window.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-23

9. Select Close from the File menu to exit the Printers window.After installing and configuring the AdobePS printer driverand PPD, see “Configuring the Printer” later in this chapter toverify that the printer interfaces are properly configured.

Windows NT Drivers

Windows NTWindows NT is a networking interface that supports systems runningWindows 3.1 and Windows 95. Each workstation on a Windows NTnetwork must be configured using the appropriate Adobe printerdriver for the operating system and the PPD for your printer.Before you begin to set up your printer for Windows NT, install theAdobe PostScript printer driver following the instructions earlier inthis chapter for the version of Windows that you are running. If youuse the XANTÉ Utilities Installer, after the installation of the utilityprograms and the application files, a message indicates that there isno Adobe printer driver available. Click OK in the Informationwindow; then, click Finish to exit the XANTÉ Utilities Installerprogram.

The Winnt35 and Winnt40 folders in the Drivers folder on theXANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contain installation instructions and filesto set up your printer in the Windows NT 3.5 and 4.0 environments.

Rather than attempt to cover each possible configuration, the followingexample describes how to configure your printer for Windows NT 4.0running on Windows 95. See the Readnt35.PDF file (Drivers: Winnt35)or the Readnt40.PDF file (Drivers: Winnt40: Standard) on the CD-ROM for additional information. You must have System Administratorprivileges to perform the Windows NT setup.

To set up your printer in Windows NT 4.0 on Windows 95

1. Copy the Oemprint.inf file from the Winnt40 folder in theDrivers folder and the PPD for your printer from the Win95folder in the PPD folder on the CD-ROM to a commondirectory on your PC, network server, or a floppy disk.

4-24 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

2. Start Windows 95; close all applications and spoolingprograms; then, click Start, Settings, Printers.

3. Double-click on Add Printer to bring up the Add PrinterWizard.

4. Select My Computer and click Next to bring up the Portsselection window (fig. 4.13).

Fig. 4.13 Port Selection Window

5. Select the port that connects your PC to the printer. A windowappears with a list of printers and manufacturers (fig. 4.14).

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-25

Fig. 4.14 Printer and Manufacturer Window

6. Click Have Disk and use the Browse function to find or type inthe path to the directory where you copied the Oemprint.inffile in step 1. Click OK.

7. The Oemprint.inf file compiles a list of printers to install.Select your printer from the list and click Next to bring up thePrinter Name window (fig. 4.15).

4-26 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.15 The Printer Name Window

8. Enter the name that appears on your printer’s start-up page asthe Printer Name and specify whether this is to be your defaultprinter; then, click Next to bring up the Shared Printer window(fig. 4.16).

Fig. 4.16 The Shared Printer Window

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-27

9. Select Shared if the printer is connected to a network. Then,select the operating systems for all computers that will sendfiles to the printer from the list in the bottom window. SelectNot shared if the printer is connected directly to your PC.Click Next to bring up the Print Test Page window (fig. 4.17).

Fig. 4.17 The Print Test Page Window

10. Select Yes to print a test page; then, click Finish. The AddPrinter Wizard copies the required files and prompts you forthe Windows NT CD-ROM.

11. Click OK even if you do not have the CD-ROM. When the AddPrinter Wizard prompts you to find files, click on Browse andfind the directory from which you installed Windows NT orthe directory which contains Pscript.DLL (for example:C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\SPOOL\DRIVERS\W32X86); then,click OK.

12. Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation.

4-28 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Configuring the Printer

If necessary, configure the printer’s communication interface usingthe front panel.

1. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.

2. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connected toyour computer (SERIAL, PARALLEL, LPR, or NOVELLPSERVER).

3. Select the ENABLE menu.

4. Select the YES option.

5. Press the Reset key until READY/IDLE appears in the display.

See Chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additional information aboutusing the front panel menus, the Ethernet Upgrade manual forinformation about configuring the Ethernet options, and “XANTÉCommand Center” later in this chapter for information aboutconfiguring communication for that utility.

PDFs FolderThis folder contains PDFs (Printer Description Files) for each XANTÉprinter. These files are required by QuarkXPress in addition to the PPD.Use these XANTÉ PDFs to ensure the highest quality output from yourprinter and QuarkXPress.

The XANTÉ Utilities Installer loads the QuarkXPress PDF. To loadthese PDFs manually

1. Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver andyour printer’s PPD following the instructions in “AdobePrinter Drivers” earlier in this chapter.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-29

2. Copy your printer’s PDF from the PDFs folder to theXpress\PDF directory on your PC by typing the followingcommand, substituting the drive letter containing the XANTÉUtilities CD-ROM for [Drive].

COPY [Drive]:\PDFS\????.PDF C:\XPRESS\PDF ↵

Note: The name of the PDF indicates the XANTÉ printer itsupports. A “W” after the name indicates the PDF isfor use on printers with the wide format option.

See the QuarkXPress section in appendix B.

PS_Files FolderThis directory contains Adobe PostScript files to help setup andmaintain your printer and a PDF file, Overview.PDF, whichdescribes these files.

These files can be downloaded to your printer using the SendPostScript File option in XANTÉ Command Center (see “XANTÉCommand Center” later in this chapter) or by typing the followingDOS command, substituting a different port, if necessary:

COPY FILENAME.PS LPT1 ↵

The Clean.ps file prints cleaning instructions for the Accel-a-Writer8100, 8200, and PlateMaker II.

The CT4_cal.ps file prints instructions for performing colorcalibration of the CT4 from a Macintosh and a PC.

D.ps contains a Control-D (PostScript’s end-of-job marker) for usewith applications that do not send a PostScript end-of-file.

The Ftp.ps file prints instructions for uploading and downloadingfiles to XANTÉ’s FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site.

4-30 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

The Initdisk.ps files are used to initialize hard disks attached to orinstalled in your printer.

• The numbered files initialize the SCSI disk with the same devicenumber (Initdsk1.ps intializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.psinitializes SCSI disk #2, etc.) on the printer.

• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the internal IDEdrive of the same designation (the A or B disk) on the printer.

• The Initdsks.ps file initializes all SCSI and IDE drives attachedto the printer.

Initializing a disk erases all information stored on the disk. See“Initializing a Hard Disk” in chapter 2.

The Novell34.ps file prints instructions for setting up a XANTÉprinter on a Novell network.

The Parmdump.ps file prints a list of the settings for thecommunication devices currently configured for your printer. If youcall XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this pageto check your setup.

The Setzone.ps file allows you to set the EtherTalk zone name forthe printer. Open the file in a text editor and change “name of zone”in the parentheses to the name of your EtherTalk zone. Save the file,and download it to your printer. The printer must be restarted beforethe change is effective.

The Set_IP.ps file allows you to set the IP address for your printer.Open the file in a text editor and change the IP address in theparentheses to the IP address of your printer. Save the file, anddownload it to your printer. The printer must be restarted before thechange is effective.

The Startpg.off file disables the printer’s start-up page feature,which prevents it from printing automatically each time the printer isrestarted (see “Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5).

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-31

The Startpg.on file enables the startup page feature, which causes itto print automatically each time the printer is restarted (see “StartupPage Menu” in chapter 5).

Sysparm.ps file prints a list of the current system parameters. If youcall XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this page tocheck your setup.

XANTÉ Command CenterXANTÉ Command Center allows you to check and control many ofthe printer’s functions from your PC. The File and Help menus aresimilar to other Windows applications and are not described in thissection.

Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center

In a PC environment, XANTÉ Command Center cannot be runacross a network, use the following procedure to set up thecommunication between the program and the printer. See Chapter 5,“Configuration,” for additional information.

1. Connect your printer to your computer through the parallel orserial port. Command Center cannot be run through a networkconnection.

2. Configure the printer’s communication interface for CommandCenter using the front panel. The printer’s serial and parallelinterfaces are enabled as the factory default, so this step maynot be necessary.

a. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.

b. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connectedto your computer (SERIAL or PARALLEL).

c. Select the ENABLE menu.

4-32 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

d. Select the YES option.

e. Press the On Line key to return the printer to theREADY/IDLE state.

3. Double-click the XANTÉ Command Center icon to open theprogram.

4. Setup Command Center to communicate with the printer.

a. From the Command Center Ports menu, select COMX toset up a serial connection or LPTX to setup a parallelconnection to the printer.

b. From the Select Product menu of the Controller menu,select your printer.

5. Select Exit from the File menu to close XANTÉ CommandCenter.

The Options Menu

This menu allows you to change the screen colors for XANTÉCommand Center.

The Controller Menu

This menu allows you to perform page and line length calibrations,get information about printer settings and status, downloadPostScript files to the printer, set network parameters, and changesome printer default settings (fig. 4.18).

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-33

Fig. 4.18 Controller Menu Options

Select ProductThis option allows you to select the printer to configure. Your PCmust be directly connected to the printer’s serial or parallel port touse XANTÉ Command Center. See “Configuration for XANTÉCommand Center” earlier in this chapter.

GeneralThese menu options allow you to receive information about theprinter’s status, perform diagnostics and troubleshooting, and setsome network parameters.

4-34 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.19 General Menu Options

• Chat—a diagnostic communication tool, to be used only asdirected by XANTÉ Technical Support. This Chat menu onlyworks through a serial connection between the PC and printer.

• Get Info—provides on screen information about the currentprinter status.

– The General screen gives the product name, the PostScriptversion, the amount of RAM installed, the margin (PageAlign) settings, and the size and status of storage devicesconfigured on the printer.

– The Diagnostic screen provides an update on the status ofthe EEPROM.

– The Product Information screen lists the product name.

• I/O Timeout—allows you to select the number of seconds theprinter waits for additional incoming data before cancelling a joband returning to the idle state, ready to accept another job.

• Print Info— allows you to print a copy of the same informationavailable through Get Info.

• Receive Queue—gives you access to a buffer that storesPostScript processing information. Check this file forinformation if you receive a PostScript error while printing a file.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-35

• Reset Controller—allows you to reboot your printer from yourcomputer. This option causes the printer to go through theinitialization process.

• Send Ctrl-D—sends a Control-D (PostScript’s end-of-jobmarker) to the printer.

• Send PostScript File—allows you to download PostScript filesto your printer.

• Set Printer Name—allows you to rename your printer on anetwork other than Novell. Your printer’s default name is theproduct name, which can be confusing on networks where theremay be more than one printer of the same model.

• Status—provides a fast, easy method to check current printerstatus. For example, it can indicate if your printer is idle andready to receive and process new data or busy.

• TCP/IP Address—allows you to set the address or enable theLPR interface on the optional Ethernet port.

• Update PPD Fonts—allows you to add all of your downloadedfonts to your current PPD (PostScript Printer Driver). Your PPDshould be updated using this menu anytime you download fonts tothe printer. This allows you to use the downloaded fonts as printerresident and to avoid packaging these font files with print jobs.

Align PaperThis option allows you to adjust the printer margin. Printer marginrefers to the page’s imageable area, not to the margin settings in anapplication. The imageable area is the portion of a page on which theprinter can lay down toner. Align Paper allows you to adjust theposition of this imageable area. See “Printer Margin Adjustment”later in this chapter for detailed instructions.

CRD DirectoryThis option is grayed out for laser printers; it is for use only withXANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. Itallows you to manage the CRD library on the Accel-a-GraphixCT4’s hard drive.

4-36 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

LinearizeThis menu allows you to create and download custom curves to yourprinter. These curves can be selected for a specific job from the Printdialog box or set as the default from the printer’s front panel. See“Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter for details.

SpoolerThis option allows you to enable and control spooling on theprinter’s hard drive. Spooling frees up the communication channelbetween your PC and printer which permits your computer to returnto other processing quickly. Spooling can be enabled for eachinterface independently using this menu or the Interface menus onthe printer’s front panel. See “The Spooler” later in this chapter fordetails.

NovellThis menu allows you to configure the Novell Print Server emulationon your printer’s optional Ethernet interface. These options shouldbe used only by your Network Administrator. See the EthernetUpgrade manual for details.

Fig. 4.20 The Novell Menu Options

Add File Server—allows you to specify up to four Novell file serversfor your printer to poll for print jobs.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-37

Delete filer Server—allows you to delete specific Novell file serversfrom the list that your printer polls for print jobs.

Delete All File Servers—allows you to delete all Novell file serversfrom the list that your printer polls for print jobs.

Printing—Allows you to enable and disable printing and file serverlogin functions for your printer’s Novell Print Server emulation overthe Ethernet interface.

Set Print Server Login Name—allows you to set the name yourprinter uses when logging into a Novell file server.

Set Print Server Password—allows you to set the password youprinter uses to login to a Novell file server.

Test DirectoryThis option is grayed out for laser printers; it is for use only withXANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. Itallows you to manage the CRD library on the Accel-a-GraphixCT4’s hard drive. This option allows you to store files on the Accel-a-Graphix CT4’s hard disk for access from the front panel.

Transfer CurveThis option is grayed out for laser printers; it is for use only withXANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.This menu allows you to create and control calibration curves for upto four printers controlled by the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.

X•ACTThis option allows you to calibrate the horizontal and verticaldimensions of your printer’s output to a standard. See “AccurateCalibration Technology” later in this chapter for details about usingXANTÉ’s patent pending X•ACT feature.

4-38 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

The Ports Menu

This menu allows you to select the PC port through which you areconnected to the printer for XANTÉ Command Center.

Fig. 4.21 The Ports Menu

See “Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center” earlier in thischapter.

The XANTÉ Linearization ToolThe XANTÉ Linearization Tool allows you to create a file thatadjusts your printer’s grayscale output to a linear standard usingdensitometer measurements. This file is downloaded to the printer asa custom gamma curve using XANTÉ Command Center.

Fig. 4.22 The XANTÉ Linearization Tool Menu

See “Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-39

ProceduresThis section contains instructions for performing commonprocedures using the programs provided in the XANTÉ Utilities.

The Spooler

Spooling can be enabled for each interface independently throughXANTÉ Command Center or the Interface menus on the printer’sfront panel. XANTÉ Command Center also allows you to managethe jobs in the spooler print queue. See chapter 8, “AdvancedFeatures,” for additional information.

Using the Front PanelThe Spooler can be enabled using the Spooler menu of the interfacethat you will be using (see chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additionalinformation).

1. Select the Interface (SETUP:INTERFACES) menu.

2. Select the printer interface (SERIAL, PARALLEL,ETHERTALK, LPR, or NOVELL PSERVER) that you use tosend files.

3. Select the Spool menu.

4. Select the YES option.

5. Press the On Line key to return the printer to theREADY/IDLE state.

Using XANTÉ Command CenterThis option allows you to enable and control spooling on theprinter’s hard drive.

To Enable the Spooler

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooler from theController menu to open the Spooler window.

4-40 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.23 The Configure Menu in the Spooler Window

2. Choose Spool Device from the Configure menu (fig. 4.23) toopen the Select Spool Device window (fig. 4.24).

Fig. 4.24 The Select Spool Device Window

3. Select the disk to store the spooled jobs or select NONE todisable spooling; then click OK. The spool device is setup;then the Spooler window reappears (fig. 4.23).

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-41

4. Choose I/O Interfaces to Spool from the Configure menu in theSpooler window to open the Select I/O Interfaces to Spoolwindow (fig. 4.25).

Fig. 4.25 The Select I/O Interfaces to Spool Window

5. Select the interface that you use to send files to the printer;then click OK. The I/O interface is set up; then the Spoolerwindow reappears (fig. 4.23).

6. Click Close to exit the Spooler menu; then select Exit from theFile menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.

To manage jobs in the spooler’s job queueThe spooler’s job queue can store up to 250 jobs. Jobs sent with theSave Spooled Job option set to True in the Print dialog box areretained indefinitely in the queue (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”). Asaved job can be reprinted quickly from the Spooling menu withoutreprocessing the file through an application.

4-42 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooler from theController menu to open the Spooler Window (fig. 4.26).

Fig. 4.26 The Spooler Window and Job Queue

Note: The Job queue lists the job ID, job status, job title,spool device, and file size of all jobs in the spoolingqueue. Job status can be W (waiting to be processed),P (currently processing), or H (already processed andheld using the Save Spooled Job feature).

2. Use the Control buttons to manage the jobs in the queue.

Print Prints the highlighted job (used to printsaved jobs)

Delete Deletes the highlighted job

Delete All Deletes all jobs in the queue

Move to Front Moves the highlighted job to the top of thequeue

Refresh Updates the screen with the current jobqueue

3. Click Close to exit the Spooler Window; then select Exit fromthe File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-43

Calibration with a Densitometer

You can create up to seven custom gamma curves and download theseto your printer, in addition to the seven standard curves supplied withXANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technology. The Linear option on theprinter’s front panel Gamma menu allows you to select Custom Gamma0 as your printer’s default. The Gamma PPD option in the Print dialogbox allows you to select any of the custom gamma curves or any of thestandard gamma curves on a job by job basis (see “The Gamma Menu”in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and “Halftone CalibrationTechnology” in chapter 8 for details).

Custom curves can be used to adjust your printer’s performance toeliminate inconsistencies due to equipment age, different inks andmedia, and environmental conditions. These curves are created usingXANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and adensitometer using the following steps:

• Printing a Calibration Strip

• Using the Densitometer

• Linearizing the Densitometer Data

• Creating a Custom Gamma Curve

Printing a Calibration StripThe first step in calibrating your printer is to print a calibration strip tomeasure the printer’s current performance as a basis for the calibration.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Linearize from theController menu to open the Linearize window.

4-44 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.27 The Linearization Window

2. Set the Number of Patches to print. The default setting of 11prints a calibration strip with levels of gray at 10% increments.

3. Click Print Calibration Strip (fig. 4.27). The calibration stripshows the printer’s performance using no gamma curvecorrection.

4. Click Close to close the Linearize window; then select Exitfrom the File menu to quit XANTÉ Command Center.

Using the DensitometerA densitometer uses a standard light source to measure the amount oflight reflected from printer output. This measurement is compared toa standard and expressed as a percentage of gray.

The densitometer, like any other precision instrument, must becalibrated before each use. After calibrating the densitometer, use itto get density measurements for the calibration strip you printed.Refer to the documentation of the model you are using forinstructions on calibrating and using the densitometer.

Note: Make sure that the densitometer reads measurements for dotarea, not dot density. If you have any questions regardingthis matter, refer to the documentation that came with yourdensitometer.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-45

Linearizing the Densitometer DataThe XANTÉ Linearization Tool uses the densitometer measurementsto calculate the adjustments necessary to correct printer performanceto a linear standard.

1. Open the XANTÉ Linearization Tool and select Generic B&Wfrom the Device menu to open that window.

Generic B/W Device

Device Data Display

100%

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

0% Graph Clear Close

Save As

Background

R G B

Fig. 4.28 The Generic B&W Device Main Window

2. Enter the measurements from the densitometer next to thecorresponding percentages in the Device Data section.

3. Click Graph to display a curve of your printer’s performanceand the standard linear curve.

4. Click Save As. Specify a file name, select a directory on yoursystem, and click OK to save the file.

5. Click Close to close the Generic B/W Device window; thenselect Exit from the File menu to close the Linearization Tool.

4-46 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Creating a Custom Gamma CurveUse XANTÉ Command Center to create and automatically downloada custom gamma curve by merging the Linearization file you createdwith a custom gamma curve on your printer. The new custom curveadjusts your printer’s performance to a linear standard for thespecific conditions (ink, media, and environment) at the time youprinted the calibration strip.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Linearize from theController menu to open the Linearize window.

Fig. 4.29 The Linearize Window

2. Click Load (fig. 4.29) to open a file list window.

3. Locate and highlight the file you created in the LinearizationTool; click OK to select the file and return to the Linearizationwindow.

4. From the Update Transfer Curve list (fig. 4.29), select thecustom gamma curve to update on the printer.

5. Click Linearize to create a new curve and download it to yourprinter. The new curve replaces the existing curve of the samename on the printer.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-47

6. Print another calibration strip and measure it with thedensitometer to verify the accuracy of the curve you created. Ifthe measured densities differ from the standards by more than3%, repeat the calibration process.

7. Click Close to close the Linearization window; then selectExit from the File menu to quit XANTÉ Command Center.

Note: To reset a custom gamma curve to the factory default (acopy of the standard Gamma 0 curve), highlight the curve inthe Update Transfer Curve list and click Reset Curve (K).

Accurate Calibration Technology

This option allows you to calibrate printed line lengths using XANTÉ’spatent pending X•ACT feature. Your printer is calibrated before it isshipped, but it may drift out of alignment over time. After using X•ACTto calibrate the line lengths, always adjust the alignment of theimageable area using the Align Paper option in XANTÉ CommandCenter.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center; then select X•ACT from theController menu to open the X•ACT window.

4-48 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.30 The X•ACT Screen

2. Select the media size from the Paper menu (Fig. 4.30).

3. Click Update/Print to print a page with a horizontal and avertical line on it. Click OK in the X•ACT message box.

4. Turn the test page so that the large and small crosses arealigned with one another as they are on the X•ACTCalibration screen (fig. 4.30).

5. Measure the horizontal line. Adjust the horizontal slide bar onthe X•ACT screen until the measured length of the line isdisplayed to the right of the bar.

6. Measure the vertical line. Adjust the vertical slide bar on theX•ACT screen until the measured length of the line isdisplayed above the bar.

7. Click Update/Print. When the new page prints, measure thelines. They should be the correct lengths. If not, repeat steps 5,6, and 7 until the measurements are correct.

8. Click Close to return to the XANTÉ Command Center mainmenu; then adjust the printer margins using the followingprocedure.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-49

Printer Margin Adjustment

The Align Paper option allows you to adjust the printer margin,which is the position of the imageable area on the media. Yourprinter is calibrated before it is shipped, but it may drift out ofalignment over time. Always adjust the alignment of the imageablearea on the page after using X•ACT Calibration.

Note: Use the standard paper size (letter or A4) for your papercassette with the Align Paper function.

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center, if necessary and select AlignPaper from the Controller menu to open the Align Paperwindow.

Fig. 4.31 Align Printer Margins

2. Click Print Test to print an alignment test page prints. ClickOK in the Alignment message box.

3. Turn the test page so that -x is to the left and -y is at the topof the crossed lines (fig. 4.31).

4-50 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

4. Check the current settings that printed near the crossed lines.The factory default is x = 0, y = 0, which should cause eachline to print 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the page.

The coordinates are listed in units that indicate the changefrom the factory default in dots per inch. When you make achange using the slide bar, the coordinates at the bottom of thescreen display the change in the same units.

Note: If the current settings are not the factory defaults andyou must make adjustments to the coordinates, it maybe easier to reset the coordinates to the factory defaultbefore beginning. To do this, click Reset Margins.Then print another alignment test page (steps 1 and 2)using the factory defaults.

5. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -x line.This distance is dependent on the y coordinate.

• To move the -x line away from the edge of the page, movethe slide on the vertical slide bar up (toward the -y).

• To move the -x line toward the edge of the page, move theslide on the vertical slide bar down (toward the +y).

6. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -y line.This distance is dependent on the x coordinate.

• To move the -y line away from the edge of the page, movethe slide on the horizontal slide bar to the left (toward the -x).

• To move the -y line toward the edge of the page, move theslide on the horizontal slide bar to the right (toward the +x).

7. Print another alignment page by clicking Print Test; then OKin the Alignment message box.

8. Measure the -x and -y lines on the new test page. If the linesare not each 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the paper, go backto step 4 and repeat the process.

9. When the -x and -y lines are set correctly, click Close. Then,select Exit from the File menu to exit Command Center.

___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-51

Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk

Your XANTÉ printer includes the Adobe PostScript 3 extended setof 136 fonts. You can download additional fonts to the printer’smemory or to an optional hard disk.

Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident, whichmeans applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs.Fonts downloaded to printer memory remain only through thecurrent power cycle. Fonts downloaded to an optional hard disksurvive a power cycle.

Caution: Fonts downloaded to memory may cause PostScripterrors due to insufficient memory. To resolve this,download the fonts to the printer’s optional hard disk orthe memory in the printer.

To remove all downloaded fonts from printer memory, turn theprinter off and then back on. Fonts stored in printer memory only lastfor the current power cycle.

To remove specific fonts downloaded to a hard disk, see thedocumentation for your font downloader program. To remove all fontsdownloaded to a hard disk, reinitialize the disk by downloading theInitdsk.ps file. See “Initializing a Hard Disk with the PC” in chapter 2.

◊ ◊ ◊

4-52 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-1

Chapter 5 - Configuration

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................5-3Printer Control ................................................................................ 5-3The Front Panel ............................................................................... 5-3

The Display Window ................................................................5-4Front Panel Lights (LEDs) ....................................................... 5-4Front Panel Keys ...................................................................... 5-5

The Configuration Menu Structure .................................................5-8Selecting Menu Options ...........................................................5-8Resetting to Factory Defaults .................................................5-10

The Main Menus ...........................................................................5-10The Miscellaneous Menu ..............................................................5-10

The Density Menu .................................................................. 5-11The DPI Menu ........................................................................5-12The Gamma Menu .................................................................. 5-12The Initial Job Menu ..............................................................5-12The Jam Recover Menu ..........................................................5-13The Language Menu ...............................................................5-13The Manual Feed Menu .........................................................5-13The NEIT Menu .....................................................................5-14The RAM Disk Menu .............................................................5-14The Font Accelerator Menu ....................................................5-15The Toner Page Menu.............................................................5-15The Screen Menu.................................................................... 5-15The Startup Page Menu ..........................................................5-15The Timeout Menu ................................................................. 5-16The Tray Switch Menu ...........................................................5-16The 1200 DPI Menu ...............................................................5-16

The Interfaces Menu .....................................................................5-17The RS232 Menu.................................................................... 5-17The Parallel Menu .................................................................. 5-19The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and LPR (Line Printer) Menus ....5-20The Novell PServer (Novell Print Server) Menu.................... 5-21

5-2 Configurationbb ______________________________________

Notes

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes the printer’s front panel and explains how touse it to configure printer features.

Printer ControlMany printer features can be set from the Print dialog box within anapplication. These application settings override the printer’s default.The default settings for the printer can be changed using the printer’sfront panel menus and, for some features, XANTÉ CommandCenter.

This chapter describes how to configure your printer’s defaultsettings using the front panel. For information about setting theoptions that are available from the Print dialog box, see chapter 6,“PPD Options.” For information about using XANTÉ CommandCenter, see chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).

The Front PanelThe printer’s front panel has a display window, status lights, andcontrol keys (fig. 5.1).

ON LINE

®

FORMFEED RESET TEST MENU ENTER TRAY

SELECT

DATA MANUALREADY

DUPLEX

DUPLEX

™

™

®®

Fig. 5.1 The Printer Front Panel

When your printer is powered on, all the lights flash and the printerperforms self-diagnostic tests which take approximately 90 seconds.If the start-up page is enabled (factory default), it prints. WhenREADY/IDLE appears in the window, the printer is ready to accepta job.

5-4 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The Display Window

The printer’s front panel window displays messages that indicateprinter status, request operator help, relay error or service information,and display menu items (fig. 5.1).

Front Panel Lights (LEDs)

Front panel lights, called LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), indicateprinter status (fig. 5.1). The following list explains what each LEDindicates when it is on or blinking.

DATA The Data LED is on and does not blink whenthe printer is receiving data. When it isblinking, it indicates that the printer isprocessing data.

READY The Ready LED is on when the printer isready to receive data and stays on unless anengine error occurs or the printer cover isopened.

MANUAL The Manual LED is on when the manualfeed tray is selected. (The manual feed trayLED in the printer icon also is on when theManual feed tray is selected.)

DUPLEX

The Duplex LED is on when the printer is inedge or tumble duplexing mode fordouble-sided printing. It is off when the printeris in simplex mode for single-sided printing.This LED is active only on a printer with theduplexer properly installed.

ON LINE The On Line LED is lit when the printer is online and ready to receive and process a file. Italso may be on while you work within theprinter’s menu structure.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-5

FORMFEED

The Form Feed LED is lit when the printerdoes not receive a form feed command at theend of a page. If this happens, take the printeroff line and press the Form Feed key. After ablank page is fed through the printer, press theOn line key to put the printer back on line.

The Printer Icon LEDs indicate which tray isselected. Only one LED on this icon is lit at atime. However, if the Manual Feed Tray LEDis on, the front panel’s Manual LED on the farleft will be on also. The bottom LED on thisicon is on only if the optional paper feeder andcassette are installed and chosen as the mediasource.

Front Panel Keys

Front panel keys provide a quick, convenient way to carry outroutine operations such as changing resolutions and to check orchange printer settings.

ON LINE The On Line key is used to take the printer onand off line. The window readsREADY/IDLE when the printer is on line orOFFLINE if it is off line. The printer must beon line to receive data from your computer.

FORMFEED

The Form Feed key allows you to feed ablank page through the printer. Some hosts donot issue a form feed command at the end of apage. If this happens, take the printer off lineand press the Form Feed key; after a blankpage feeds, press the On line key to put theprinter back on line.

5-6 Configurationbb ______________________________________

RESET The up arrow Reset ↑ key cancels aprocessing job if you take the printer off lineand press the Reset ↑ key. In the configurationmenu structure, press the Reset ↑ key to backout of the menus one level at a time.

TEST The left arrow Test ← key allows you toprint a start-up page when the printer off line,not in the menu structure. In the menustructure, press the Test ← key to scroll backthrough options within the current menu or tolower the numeric value option, such as theGamma setting.

ENTER The down arrow Enter ↓ key allows you toselect a menu or option within the menustructure when it appears in the window.When you select an option, the option nameswitches to all capitalized letters in thewindow.

MENU The right arrow Menu → key allows you toenter the menu structure when READY/IDLEor OFFLINE appears in the window and toscroll forward through menus and options.When you first press this key to enter thestructure, the last main menu you were indisplays. After each selection (using the Enter↓ key), use the Menu → key to scroll throughthe options at that level or to increase thenumeric value of an option, such the Gammasetting.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-7

TRAYSELECT

The Tray Select key is used to change thedefault paper tray. When you press this key,the first tray that appears in the window is thecurrent tray selection. Press the Tray Selectkey to toggle between trays. The options areman feed (manual feed tray), cassette(standard cassette), upper optional, andlower optional . The last two selectionsappear only if these optional trays areinstalled.

Note: The tray options do not appear in all capitalletters in the display window. The print iconLEDs indicate the current selection.

DUPLEX The Duplex key is used to set the printer forsimplex (single-sided) printing, edge-duplex(double-sided, side-to-side, book style)printing, or tumble (double-sided, flip chartstyle) printing (Fig. 7.2). Press the Duplex keyto display the current selection in the window.Press the Duplex key again to scroll throughthe options. To select an option as the default,press the Duplex key until the desired option isdisplayed; then, press the Enter ↓ key or allowthe printer to return automatically to theReady/Idle state.

Note: The Duplex key options appear in lowercase letters in the window. The DuplexLED is on if the printer is in edge- ortumble-duplexing mode; it is off when insimplex mode.

5-8 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The Configuration Menu StructureUse the configuration menus to set up and change your printer defaultsettings through the front panel. This section explains and gives anexample of configuring your printer using the menu structure and coversresetting to factory defaults. The printer’s quick reference sheet in theback of this manual illustrates the menu structure.

Selecting Menu Options

Use the front panel menus to set up your printer to communicatewith your host computer and to change printer default settings.

Note: Four printer keys have arrows to indicate their use within themenu structure (the Reset ↑ key, the Enter ↓ key, the Menu→ key, and the Test ← key). See “Front Panel Keys” earlierin this chapter for details.

To enter the menu structure and make selections

1. Make sure the printer is on and idle.

2. Press the Menu → key to enter the menu structure. The lastmain menu you were in appears in the window.

3. Continue pressing the Menu → key until the desired menuappears.

4. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the desired menu and access thenext menu level down. One of the options within the selectedmenu appears.

5. Press the Menu → key until the desired submenu/optionappears. If the option is not capitalized, go to step 6. If it iscapitalized, it is already the current selection. Go to step 7 tomake further selection or to step 8 to exit the menu structure.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-9

6. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the desired option if it is not anumeric value. If it is numeric, use the Test ← key to lower orthe Menu → key to raise it to the desired amount; then, pressthe Enter ↓ key.

When selected, the option’s name changes from lowercaseletters to all capitalized letters. If you do not want to makefurther selections, skip to step 8.

7. Use the Reset ↑, Test ←, Menu →, and the Enter ↓ keys toselect other desired options. Repeat steps 2 and 6 until youmake all desired selections.

8. Press the On Line key to save the changes, and put the printerback on line, ready for printing. READY/IDLE appears in thewindow.

Example: Changing resolution from 600 x 600 dpi to 1200 x 1200 dpi

1. Make sure the printer is on and idle.

2. Press the MENU → key until SETUP:MISCELLANEOUSappears in the window.

3. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the Miscellaneous menu.

4. Press the Menu → key until MISCELLANEOUS:DPI appearsin the window.

5. Press the Enter ↓ key to enter the dpi menu.

6. Press the Menu → key until dpi:1200 1200 appears.

7. Press the Enter ↓ key to select dpi:1200 1200 . Theselection changes to all capital letters, DPI:1200 1200 , inthe window.

8. Press the On Line key. READY/IDLE appears in the window.

The printer’s default resolution is now 1200 x 1200 dpi.

5-10 Configurationbb ______________________________________

Resetting to Factory Defaults

To reset printer options to factory default settings, turn off theprinter, hold in the On Line and Tray Select keys, turn on the printer,and then release the keys after RESET 1 appears in the window.

The Main MenusThe printer’s front panel has two main configuration menus, theMiscellaneous menu and the Interfaces menu.

• Miscellaneous menu (SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS) allows youto set the defaults for printer features.

• Interfaces menu (SETUP:INTERFACES) allows you to set thedefaults for the printer’s three standard (RS-232, parallel, andLocalTalk) and optional Ethernet interfaces.

The Miscellaneous MenuThe Miscellaneous (SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS) menu allows youto set the defaults for printer features.

• DENSITY • MANUAL FEED • TIMEOUT

• DPI • NEIT (optional) • TRAY SWITCH

• GAMMA • RAM DISK • TONER PAGE

• INITIAL JOB • FONT ACCELERATOR

• JAM RECOVER • SCREEN • 1200 DPI

• LANGUAGE • STARTUP PAGE

Use the procedure in “Selecting Menu Options” earlier in thischapter to select these submenus and their options.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-11

MENU

SETUPMISCELLANEOUS

ENTER

TEST

*NEIT is active only with negative print enabled in the PPD

**FONT ACCELERATOR menu is active only when RAMDISK is enabled for more than 1 MB

***1200 DPI menu is active only when the printer has 20 MB or more of RAM installed

MISCELLANEOUSDENSITY

MISCELLANEOUSGAMMA

MISCELLANEOUSINITIAL JOB

MISCELLANEOUSDPI

MISCELLANEOUSNEIT*

MISCELLANEOUSLANGUAGE

MISCELLANEOUSJAM RECOVER

MISCELLANEOUSMANUAL FEED

MISCELLANEOUSRAM DISK

MISCELLANEOUSFONT ACCELERATOR**

MISCELLANEOUSSCREEN

MISCELLANEOUSTONER PAGE

MISCELLANEOUSSTARTUP PAGE

MISCELLANEOUSTIMEOUT

MISCELLANEOUSTRAY SWITCH

MISCELLANEOUS1200 DPI***

Fig. 5.2 The Miscellaneous Menu

The Density MenuMISCELLANEOUSDENSITY

7654321

The Density menu allows you to select densitysettings to control the amount (density) oftoner laid down by the printer. The tonerdensity (darkness of the image) increases asthe number increases —1 is the lightest and 7is the darkest. The factory default is 5. See“Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7 fordetails.

5-12 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The DPI MenuMISCELLANEOUSDPI

600 x 6001200 x 1200

The DPI menu allows you to select the defaultprinting resolution. The factory default is 600x 600. 1200 x 1200 dpi can be selected if youhave the resolution upgrade installed.

Note: If you add a memory upgrade, higherresolutions may appear in the DPI menu.However, unless the correspondingresolution upgrade has been added to yourprinter, the copy will print incorrectly ifthe higher resolution is selected.

The Gamma MenuMISCELLANEOUSGAMMA

0123456linear

The Gamma menu allows you to useXANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technologyto choose one of eight transfer curves tocontrol your printer output. Options are 0-6and linear. O is no change; curves 1-5progressively lighten the midrange grayscalevalues; 6 is a negative print; and linearallows you to use a custom curve createdwith XANTÉ Linearizer and downloaded tothe printer. The factory default is 3.

See “Gamma” in chapter 6, “GammaCorrections” in chapter 8, and “Calibrationwith a Densitometer” in chapter 3 (Macintosh)or chapter 4 (PC).

The Initial Job MenuMISCELLANEOUSINITIAL JOB

YESno The Initial Job menu allows you to have the

printer execute a Sys/Start file, if one existson an external hard disk when the printer isturned on. Options are to enable (YES) or todisable (NO) this feature. The factorydefault is YES.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-13

The Jam Recover MenuMISCELLANEOUSJAM RECOVER

yesNO The Jam Recover menu allows you to enable

(YES) or to disable (NO) the feature thatreprints the last page processed after a paperjam is cleared. When enabled, Jam Recoverworks as long as you do not turn off the powerto the printer while removing the jam. Thefactory default is NO.

The Language MenuMISCELLANEOUSLANGUAGE

ENGLISHespanolfrancaisdeutschjapanese

The Language menu allows you to select thelanguage used in the printer’s display window.The factory default is ENGLISH.

The Manual Feed Menu

MISCELLANEOUSMANFEED

LETTERlegala4b5b411x17a3executive12x25com10 envmonarch envdl envc5 env

The Manual Feed menu allows you to selectthe size media which is manually fed to theprinter. The factory default is LETTER.

To print on a size of media that is not listed inthe Manual Feed menu, select the paper sizethrough an application. Application selectionsoverride front panel settings.

Note: With the extra wide print feature, somelarger pages convert to wider imageablearea printing. To print with the standardareas, select the page sizes through anapplication by entering the page sizes. See“Media Sizes” in chapter 7 for details.

5-14 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The NEIT MenuMISCELLANEOUSNEIT

01…10…20

If your printer has the NEIT upgrade, use thismenu to reduce the plugging (filling in) of tinywhite spaces inside letters such as a or e and inhairline images. Options are 0 to 20;increasing the number decreases the amount ofplugging. The factory default is 10. See“Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology” inchapter 8 for details about this patent pendingoption from XANTÉ.

Note: Negative Print must be set to True in thePPD for the NEIT menu setting to takeeffect.

The RAM Disk MenuMISCELLANEOUSRAM DISK

0 MEG1 meg2 meg…(maximum)

The RAM Disk menu allows you to set aside asection of printer RAM to be used as aread/write device for downloading fonts andimplementing XANTÉ’s Font Accelerator.Options are 0 (which turns off RAM disk) and1 MB increments to the maximum availableRAM (installed RAM minus RAM requiredby the system). The factory default is 0. Theprinter must be cycled (turned on and off) forthe selections to become effective. See “FontAccelerator and RAM Disk” in chapter 8.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-15

The Font Accelerator MenuMISCELLANEOUSFONT ACCELERATOR

0%20%40%60%80%100%

The Font Accelerator menu allows you to setaside a percentage of available RAM diskspace to store recently used fonts for fastsystem access. Fonts must be downloaded to ahard disk attached to the printer, RAM diskmust be enabled for at least 1 MB or more,and the system must have a minimum of 12MB of RAM available. The factory default is100%. See “Font Accelerator and RAM Disk”in chapter 8.

The Toner Page MenuMISCELLANEOUSTONER PAGE

YESno The Toner Page menu allows you to enable

(YES) or disable (NO) automatic printing of atoner reorder form when toner gets low. Ifenabled and toner is low, the low toner pageprints every 250 pages. The factory default isYES.

The Screen MenuMISCELLANEOUSSCREEN

NORMALenhanced 145lgenhanced 197lgenhanced 256lg

The Screen menu allows you to use XANTÉ’sEnhanced Screening Technology to increasethe number of levels of gray produced for aline screen setting. The factory default ofNORMAL uses the line screen setting of yourapplication. See “Levels of Gray” and“Enhanced Screening” in chapter 8.

The Startup Page MenuMISCELLANEOUSSTARTUP PAGE

YESno The Startup Page menu allows you to enable

(YES) or to disable (NO) automatic printing ofthe start-up page each time the printer isturned on. The factory default is YES.

5-16 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The Timeout MenuMISCELLANEOUSTIMEOUT

20 sec40 SEC60 sec300 secnever

The Timeout menu allows you to select thenumber of seconds the printer waits foradditional incoming data before cancelling ajob and returning to the Ready/Idle state toaccept another job. This prevents an indefinitetie-up on one job. The factory default is 40SEC.

Select 300 or NEVER for large files, such asgraphic intensive or CAD (Computer AidedDesign) files. With the NEVER selection, theprinter does not time out; it continues to waitfor additional data.

The Tray Switch MenuMISCELLANEOUSTRAY SWITCH

OFFnormalmanual feed

The Tray Switch menu allows you to use theprinter’s tray chaining feature. NORMALenables tray chaining to all installed papercassettes. MANUAL FEED enables traychaining to all installed paper cassettes and themanual feed tray. The factory default is OFF,which disables tray chaining. See “TrayChaining” in chapter 7.

The 1200 DPI MenuMISCELLANEOUS1200 DPI

ENABLEdisable The 1200 DPI menu allows you to turn on

(ENABLE) or turn off (DISABLE) RAM setaside for 1200 dpi printing. If your printer has20 MB or more memory, the RAM isconfigured to allow full frame buffering for1200 dpi. If you do not have or do not want touse 1200 dpi resolution, use this menu toreallocate the memory. The factory default isENABLE.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-17

The Interfaces MenuThe Interfaces menu (SETUP:INTERFACES) allows you to set thedefaults for the printer’s three standard (RS232, parallel, and LocalTalk)and optional Ethernet interface. This menu includes following submenus.

• RS232 • ETHERTALK

• PARALLEL • LPR (Line Printer)

• LOCALTALK • NOVELL PSERVER (Novell PrintServer)

MENU

SETUPINTERFACES

ENTER

TEST

INTERFACESNOVELL PSERVER

INTERFACESLPR

INTERFACESETHERTALK

INTERFACESLOCALTALK

INTERFACESPARALLEL

INTERFACESRS232

Fig. 5.3 The Interfaces Menu

Use the procedure in “Selecting Menu Options” earlier in thischapter to select these submenus and their options.

The RS232 MenuINTERFACESRS232

ENABLEMODEBAUD RATEPARITYFLOW CONTROLDATA BITSSTOP BITSSPOOL

The RS232 menu allows you to enable andconfigure the RS232 serial interfacecommunication settings for your printer.

5-18 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The Enable MenuRS232ENABLE

YESno

The Enable menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the RS232 interface. Thefactory default is YES.

The Mode MenuRS232MODE

PS STDps binps tbcp

The Mode menu allows you to selectPostScript Standard (PS STD), PostScriptBinary (PS BIN), or PostScript Tagged BinaryCommunication Protocol (PS TBCP) for filessent to the printer’s RS232 interface. Thefactory default is PS STD.

The Baud Rate MenuRS232BAUD RATE

1200960019200

The Baud Rate menu allows you to select abaud rate of 1200, 9600, and 19200. Thefactory default is 9600.

The Parity MenuRS232PARITY

NONEoddevenmarkspace

The Parity menu allows you to select theparity for the printer’s serial interface to agreewith the host computer. The factory default isNONE.

The Flow Control MenuRS232FLOW CONTROL

XON/XOFFdtr

The Flow Control menu allows you to selectXON/XOFF (software) or DTR (hardware)flow control. The factory default isXON/XOFF.

The Data Bits MenuRS232DATA BITS

87

The Data Bits menu allows you to select either7 or 8 data bits. The factory default is 8.

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-19

The Stop Bits MenuRS232STOP BITS

12

The Stop Bits menu allows you to select thestop bit setting for your printer’s serialinterface to agree with the setting on your hostcomputer. The factory default is 1.

The Spool MenuRS232SPOOL

YESno

The Spool menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the spooling feature on theRS232 interface. The factory default is NO.See “The Spooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) orchapter 4 (PC).

The Parallel MenuINTERFACESPARALLEL

ENABLEMODESPOOL

The Parallel menu allows you to enable andconfigure your printer’s parallel interface.

The Enable MenuPARALLELENABLE

YESno

The Enable menu allows you to enable(YES) or to disable (NO) the printer’sparallel interface on your printer. Thefactory default is YES.

The Mode MenuPARALLELMODE

PS TBCPps binps std

The Mode menu allows you to selectPostScript Standard (PS STD), PostScriptBinary (PS BIN), or PostScript Tagged BinaryCommunication Protocol (PS TBCP) for filessent to the printer’s parallel interface. Thefactory default is PS TBCP.

The Spool MenuPARALLELSPOOL

YESno

The Spool menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for theparallel interface. The factory default is NO.See “The Spooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) orchapter 4 (PC).

5-20 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, andLPR (Line Printer) Menus

INTERFACESXXXX*

* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR

ENABLEMODESPOOL The LocalTalk menu allows you to configure

the printer’s LocalTalk interface. TheEtherTalk and LPR menus allow you toconfigure the printer’s Ethernet interface.

The Enable MenuXXXX*ENABLE

YESno

* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR

The Enable menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the printer’s LocalTalkinterface and the EtherTalk and Line Printerprotocols on the printer’s Ethernet interface.The factory default for LocalTalk is YES. Thefactory default for EtherTalk and LPR is YESif the Ethernet board is installed properly.

The Mode MenuXXXX*MODE

PS STD

* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR

The Mode menu specifies PostScriptStandard (PS STD) as the active printermode for files sent to the printer’s LocalTalkor Ethernet interface.

The Spool MenuXXXX*SPOOL

YESno

* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR

The Spool menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for theprinter’s LocalTalk or Ethernet interface. Thefactory default is NO. See “The Spooler” inchapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).

_______________________________________ Configuration 5-21

The Novell PServer (NovellPrint Server) Menu

INTERFACESNOVELL PSERVER

ENABLEMODEPROTOCOLSPOOLTIMEOUT

The Novell PServer menu allows you toenable and configure the printer’s Ethernetinterface for Novell Print Server emulation.

The Enable MenuNOVELL PSERVERENABLE

YESno

The Enable menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the Novell Printer Serveremulation on the printer’s Ethernet interface.The factory default is NO.

The Mode MenuNOVELL PSERVERMODE

PS STDThe Mode menu specifies PostScript Standard(PS STD) as the active printer mode for filessent using the Novell Print Server protocol onthe Ethernet port.

The Protocol MenuNOVELL PSERVERPROTOCOL

802.3no snap

The Protocol Menu allows you to select 802.3or 802.2 (NO SNAP) as the Novell protocolframe type used on your network. The factorydefault is 802.3.

The Spool MenuNOVELL PSERVERSPOOL

YESno

The Spool menu allows you to enable (YES)or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for theNovell Print Server emulation on the Ethernetinterface. The factory default is NO. See “TheSpooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4(PC).

5-22 Configurationbb ______________________________________

The Timeout MenuNOVELL PSERVERTIMEOUT

5 min10 min15 min20 min25 min30 MINnever

The Timeout menu allows you to set a timeoutfor the Novell Print Server emulation. If theprinter cannot locate an assigned file serverduring the selected time, the Novell PrintServer emulation is disabled. When the fileservers are active on the network again, enablethe Novell Print Server interface usingXANTÉ Command Center or the printer’sfront panel. The options are NEVER and 5minute increments to a maximum of 30minutes. The factory default is 30 MIN.

◊ ◊ ◊

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-1

Chapter 6 - PPD Settings

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................6-3About the PPD ................................................................................ 6-3Selecting PPD Options .................................................................... 6-3

In a Macintosh Environment ....................................................6-4In a Windows 95 Environment .................................................6-6In a Windows 3.1 Environment ................................................6-8

The PPD Menus .............................................................................. 6-9Duplex ....................................................................................6-10Enhanced Screens ................................................................... 6-10Fast Imaging ...........................................................................6-11Gamma ...................................................................................6-11Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift .......................................6-12Mirror Print ............................................................................. 6-12Negative Print .........................................................................6-13Resolution ............................................................................... 6-14Save Spooled Job .................................................................... 6-15Smooth Shading .....................................................................6-15Tray Switch............................................................................. 6-16

6-2 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Notes

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes the options that can be selected through yourprinter’s PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file.

About the PPDThe PPD allows you to select the settings for some printer featuresfrom your application’s Print dialog box. These settings override theprinter’s front panel menu settings (see chapter 5, “Configuration”)

For these options to be available, the Adobe PostScript printer driverand your printer’s PPD must be installed and configured properly.See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).

Selecting PPD OptionsIn most applications, printer specific options in the PPD are accessedthrough the Device Options tab in Windows 95, the Features tab inWindows 3.1, and through the Printer Specific Options menu on aMacintosh.

See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design,” forinformation about specific applications

6-4 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

In a Macintosh Environment

To configure a printer feature from the Print dialog box

1. Select the AdobePS icon from the Chooser and configure yourprinter’s options in the PPD following the instructions inchapter 3.

2. Select Print from the application’s File menu. The Print dialogbox appears.

3. Make sure your printer is selected in the Printer drop down menu;then, click General to display the list of options (fig. 6.1).

Fig. 6.1 The Adobe Options Menu in the Print Dialog Box

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-5

4. Select Printer Specific Options to bring up the printer optionmenus (fig. 6.2).

Fig. 6.2 The Printer Specific Options Menu

5. Use the scroll bar on the right to locate the option; then, usethe drop down menu next to the option to select the setting.Repeat to configure other printer options.

6. Click Save Settings to save the Print dialog box settings as thedefaults for all jobs sent to the selected printer.

7. Click Print. After the file goes to the printer, the Print dialogbox closes and the application screen reappears.

6-6 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

In a Windows 95 Environment

To select a PPD option from the Print dialog box

1. Select Print from your application’s File menu. The Printdialog box appears.

Fig. 6.3 The Windows 95 Print Dialog Box

2. Make sure your printer is selected in the Name box at the topof the Print dialog box; then click Properties.

3. Select the Graphics tab to set the Resolution option; select theDevice Options tab for all other options. Make sure that yourprinter’s installable options are configured following theinstructions in chapter 4.

4. Use the scroll bar on the right to locate the feature in thePrinter feature box. Highlight the feature to display the settingoptions in the Change Setting for box (fig. 6.4).

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-7

Fig. 6.4 The Windows 95 Device Options Tab

5. Select the setting from the drop down menu in the ChangeSetting for box. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure other printerfeatures.

6. Click OK to close the Properties window. The Print dialog boxreappears.

7. Click OK to print. The Print dialog box closes and theapplication screen reappears.

6-8 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

In a Windows 3.1 Environment

To select a PPD option from the Print dialog box

1. Select Print from your application’s File menu; then, clickSetup to bring up the Print Setup dialog box.

Fig. 6.5 The Windows 3.1 Print Dialog Box

2. If your printer is not the default printer, select it from theSpecific Printer drop down menu; then, click Options.

3. Select the Features tab, if necessary.

Fig 6.6 The Windows 3.1 Features Tab

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-9

4. Use the scroll bar on the left to select printer features and thescroll bars on the right of each feature to display and select theoptions. Make sure that your printer’s installable options areconfigured following the instructions in chapter 4.

5. Click OK to close the Options window and return to the Printdialog box.

6. Click OK to print. After the file goes to the printer, the Printdialog box closes and the application screen reappears.

The PPD MenusMany printer features can be configured from the Print dialog box inyour application. These settings override the printer’s defaultsettings. This allows you to customize printer features for each jobwithout resetting the printer’s front panel menus.

The Auto Setup feature of the Chooser on a Macintosh sets thedefaults for the PPD menus and the printer’s installable options toreflect the settings on the printer front panel (see “Configuring thePPD” in chapter 3 for details). The defaults for the PPD menus andthe printer’s installable options on a PC must be set manually (see“Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11” and “Configuringthe PPD for Windows 95” in chapter 4).

The following chart lists the features that can be configured for eachprint job from the PPD.

Duplex Negative Print

Enhanced Screens Resolution

Fast Imaging Save Spooled Job

Gamma Smooth Shading

Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift Tray Switch

Mirror Print

6-10 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Duplex

The Duplex menu (XTDuplex on the Windows 3.1/3.11 Featurestab) allows you to select the settings for the optional duplexer. Theoptions are Simplex (print without using the duplexer), Edge-duplex(print double-sided, book style), and Tumble-duplex (print double-sided, flip chart style)

The duplexer must be installed on the printer and configuredproperly in the PPD before the options appear in the Print dialog box.See chapter 9 to install the duplexer, chapter 7 to use the duplexer,and chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) to set up the PPD for theduplexer. See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” forinformation about setting the Duplex configuration in PageMaker.

Note: The Duplex feature requires a minimum of 12 MB of RAMat 600 dpi and 40 MB at 1200 dpi for letter size duplexing(see “Printer Memory Requirements” in chapter 9).

Enhanced Screens

The Enhanced Screens (XTScreen on the Windows 3.1/3.11 Featurestab) menu allows you to use XANTÉ’s Enhanced ScreeningTechnology to increase the number of gray levels for a line screensetting. The options are Normal Screen (which uses the line screenset in your application), 145 Gray Levels, 197 Gray Levels, and 256Gray Levels. See “Enhanced Screening” in chapter 8 for details.

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-11

Fast Imaging

The Fast Imaging menu allows you to select from two methods ofimage data compression for faster printing when image quality is notthe primary concern. The options are None, which prints at normalspeed and with no data compression; Optimized for Quality, whichcompresses image data for faster printing than normal but with some(usually not noticeable) loss of image quality; and Optimized forSpeed, which implements a greater degree of data compression toprovide the fastest print time but with the possibility of a noticeableloss of data quality.

Note: The Optimize selections do not function if the print jobcontains an image that is masked or rotated to anything otherthan 0°, 90°, 180°, or 270°.

Gamma

The Gamma menu allows you to choose one of seven gammacorrection curves supplied by XANTÉ or a custom curve createdwith XANTÉ’s Linearizer. These curves adjust the grayscale valuesfor rendering the image.

Options are Gamma 0 through 6, and Custom Gamma 0 through 6.Gamma curves 1 through 5 progressively lighten the midrangegrayscale values in an image. Gamma 0 makes no change to the imageand Gamma 6 produces a reverse (negative) image. Custom Gamma 0through 6 use curves that you create and download to the printer.

See “Gamma Corrections” in chapter 8, “The Gamma Menu” inchapter 5, and “Calibration with a Densitometer” in chapter 3(Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).

6-12 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift

The Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift menus allow you to adjustthe horizontal and vertical placement of an image on the media in1/4" (6 mm) increments up to 3 in (76 mm). With these features, youcan ensure that an image is placed correctly to be printed on a press.

Note: To use the Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift features, theprinter must have adequate RAM installed to allow fullimage buffering (tabloid size output requires a minimum of12 MB at 600 dpi and 40 MB at 1200 dpi). See “PrinterMemory Requirements” in chapter 9.

Mirror Print

The Mirror Print menu allows you to produce a mirror image whichis reversed left to right, which is used to produce right readingemulsion side down documents required for imaging silk screens ormetal plates. The options are True to enable the feature and False todisable it. To ensure the highest quality when producing mirrorimages, use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than anapplication setting.

Fig. 6.7 A Mirror Image

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-13

Negative Print

The Negative Print menu allows you to print a negative image whereblack and white are reversed, which is used in offset printing. Theoptions are True to enable the feature and False to disable it. Toensure the highest quality when producing negative images, use thismenu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting.

Note: To use the Negative Print feature, the printer must haveadequate RAM installed to allow full image buffering(tabloid size output requires a minimum of 12 MB at 600 dpiand 40 MB at 1200 dpi). See “Printer MemoryRequirements” in chapter 9.

Fig. 6.8 A Negative Print

6-14 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Resolution

The Resolution menu allows you to select the printing resolution fora specific job. If you have a resolution upgrade installed on yourprinter, the options are 600 x 600 dpi and 1200 x 1200 dpi.

If you have installed the resolution upgrade and the required RAM,but the upgrade cannot be selected (it is grayed out), the RAM maynot be configured properly in the PPD. The following proceduresdescribe how to configure the RAM in common environments.

Macintosh: Go to the Chooser, select the AdobePS icon andyour printer; then select Setup. Make sure the correctPPD is selected; then select Configure. Make surethe correct amount of RAM is selected in theInstalledMemory dialog box.

Windows 95: From the Windows 95 desktop, click Start, thenSettings, and then Printers. Select your printer; clickthe right mouse button; then click Properties fromthe drop down menu. Select the Device Options taband make sure that the VMOption under Installableoptions is set for the amount of installed RAM.Select the Graphics tab and set the resolution.

Windows 3.1: Select Printers from the Control Panel. Select yourprinter; then click Setup. Select the Features tab andset InstalledMemory to match the amount ofinstalled RAM.

See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” forinformation about setting the RAM configuration in PageMaker.

________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-15

Save Spooled Job

The Save Spooled Job menu allows you to retain print jobs in thespooler’s queue. These jobs can be reprinted from the queue,eliminating the time required to process the file and send it to theprinter. The options are True to enable the feature and False to disable it.

The printer port you are using must be set up for spooling, thespooler option must be configured in the PPD, and the printer musthave a hard disk attached before you can use the Save Spooled Joboption. See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) for details onconfiguring the PPD and using the spooling Feature. See chapter 5for details on configuring the front panel Spool menus.

See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” forinformation about setting the spooler configuration in PageMaker.

Smooth Shading

The Smooth Shading menu allows you to implement the AdobePostScript 3 method of rendering gradient blends which produces thehighest quality image of which the printer is capable at the selectedresolution. For some images, the PostScript files created withSmooth Shading are smaller and print faster than those created usingPostScript Level 2. The Smooth Shading menu is set to OFF as thedefault. The options of Maximum, High, Medium, Low control thedegree to which Smooth Shading is implemented.

6-16 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Tray Switch

The Tray Switch menu in Windows 3.1/3.11, Windows 95, and someMacintosh applications allows you to specify whether to use theprinter’s tray chaining feature. The True option enables tray chainingto all cassettes and the manual feed tray that are loaded with thesame size paper. The False option disables tray chaining.

Most Macintosh applications allow you to configure the printer’stray chaining feature one of two ways:

• Use the Paper Source options on the General menu tospecify the media tray. The All pages from options allowyou to choose a specific tray or use the printer’s default toprint all pages of a job. The First page from andRemaining from options allow you to specify one tray forthe first page and a different tray for the rest of the printjob.

• Use the Error Handling menu in the Print dialog box tospecify tray chaining. Select Use printer’s default to usethe setting configured in the Tray Switch menu on theprinter’s front panel; or select Switch to another cassettewith the same paper size to implement tray chaining whenthe Tray Switch menu on the printer’s front panel isdisabled.

See “Tray Chaining” in chapter 7 for details.

◊ ◊ ◊

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-1

Chapter 7 - Using Media and Toner

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................7-3Media Specifications .......................................................................7-3

Selecting Media ........................................................................7-3Storing Media ...........................................................................7-4

Media Sizes .....................................................................................7-5Standard Media Sizes ...............................................................7-6XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes ...................................................... 7-7

Feeding Media to the Printer ...........................................................7-8Determining the Leading Edge.................................................7-8The Paper Cassettes .................................................................. 7-8The Manual Feed Tray .............................................................7-9Tray Chaining .........................................................................7-10

Using Special Media .....................................................................7-10Printing Computer-to-Film ..................................................... 7-10Printing Transparencies ..........................................................7-11Printing Envelopes .................................................................. 7-12Printing Labels .......................................................................7-12Printing on Custom Sized Media............................................ 7-13

Printing Double-Sided Copy .........................................................7-14Manual Double-Sided Copy ...................................................7-14Duplexing ............................................................................... 7-15

Handling the Toner Cartridge........................................................ 7-17Adjusting Toner Output ..........................................................7-18

7-2 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

Notes

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-3

IntroductionThis chapter describes how to select and use various media types andsizes, how to create double-sided output, and how to handle the tonercartridge.

Media SpecificationsIn addition to printer capabilities and application features, the qualityof printed output depends on the type and condition of the mediaused. To ensure that your job prints correctly, always select mediathat is appropriate for the print job and the printer. Storing andhandling the media carefully prevents damage to both the media andthe printer.

Selecting Media

Use the guidelines in this section when selecting media to use withyour XANTÉ printer. To save on media costs, test a sample of newmedia before buying in quantity and run a sample on plain paper tocheck layout before using more expensive stock.

Caution: All media used in the printer should be able to withstanda temperature of 374˚ F (190˚ C). Inks on preprintedsheets such as letterhead that cannot withstand thesetemperatures can cause permanent damage to theprinter’s fusing rollers.

Standard 20 lb bond copier paper works well for most printing jobs.Use 24 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper to ensure more consistentcoverage when higher quality is desired.

7-4 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

You can create computer-to-film output using XANTÉ’s Myriadfilm. When processed through XANTÉ’s FilmStar 2, the resultingprofessional quality film image can be used to burn metal plates andsilk screen emulsions, bypassing the expensive camera and darkroomsteps required in conventional printing. Use only XANTÉ’s Myriadfilm. It is designed specifically for use with your printer andFilmStar 2. Using other film material may void your printerwarranty.

Avoid media which

• Is too thick, thin, rough, coated, synthetically reinforced, orextremely textured (such as course or embossed stock)

• Has been or is wet, damp, curled, torn, creased, or otherwisedamaged

• Has metal clasps, strings, staples, cutouts perforations, windows,or exposed adhesives

• Is a partial sheet of labels or a sheet on which the glue hassoaked through the labels.

Caution: Using media that does not meet these guidelines mayvoid your printer warranty. XANTÉ is not responsiblefor damages caused by media. Repair will be at theuser’s expense.

Storing Media

Improper storage practices can damage media, which can causeprinter jams and reduced print quality. To avoid problems, alwaysstore media flat (not on its side or end), in its own wrapper, in smallnot too heavy stacks, and in a dark, dry, cool area.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-5

Media SizesYour XANTÉ printer allows you to use standard and custom mediasizes. The following chart provides an overview of the media sizesand types that you can feed using your printer’s paper cassettes andthe manual feed tray.

Media GuidelinesMedia Size Weight Feed Capacity*

Source (approximate)

Paper Letter: 8.50" x 11.00" 17 to 24 lb Paper 250 to 750**(216 mm x 279 mm) (64 to 90 g/m2) Cassette

Legal: 8.50" x 14.00"(216 mm x 356 mm)

Ledger: 11.00" x 17.00"(279 mm x 432 mm)

A4: 8.26" x 11.69"(210 mm x 297 mm)

A3: 11.69" x 16.54"(297 mm x 420 mm)

Paper 3.90" x 5.80" 17 to 24 lb Manual 100(99 mm x 147 mm) (64 to 90 g/m2) Feed up to Tray

Transparency 12.00" x 25.00" 17 to 34 lb 50(305 mm x 635 mm) (64 to 128 g/m2)

Labels 40

Myriad Film See Myriad Film Sizes 3 mil 25

* Paper capacity is based on 20 lb (80 g/m2) stock

** 750 sheet capacity requires two optional paper cassettes

Fig. 7.1 Media Guidelines

7-6 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

Standard Media Sizes

The physical page size is different from the imageable area. Theportion of a physical page on which the printer can lay down toner isthe imageable area. The following chart gives the Accel-a-Writer8300 imageable areas for many standard media sizes.

Media ImageableSize Areas

Letter 8.50" x 11.00" 8.32" x 10.88"(216 mm x 279 mm) (211 mm x 276 mm)

Legal 8.50" x 14.00" 8.37" x 13.84"(216 mm x 356 mm) (213 mm x 352 mm)

A4 8.26" x 11.69" 8.08" x 11.52"(210 mm x 297 mm) (205 mm x 293 mm)

A3 11.69" x 16.54" 11.57" x 16.37"(297 mm x 420 mm) (294 mm x 416 mm)

B5 7.17" x 10.13" 6.99" x 10.03"(182 mm x 257 mm) (178 mm x 255 mm)

B4 10.13" x 14.34" 9.92" x 14.19"(257 mm x 364 mm) (252 mm x 360 mm)

Ledger 11.00" x 17.00" 10.88" x 16.80"(11 x 17) (279 mm x 432 mm) (276 mm x 427 mm)

Executive 7.25" x 10.50" 7.07" x 10.40"(185 mm x 267 mm) (180 mm x 264 mm)

Com 10 4.13" x 9.50" 4.05" x 9.33"(105 mm x 241 mm) (103 mm x 237 mm)

Monarch 3.88" x 7.50" 3.73" x 7.36"(99 mm x 191 mm) (95 mm x 187 mm)

DL 4.33" x 8.67" 4.21" x 8.47"(110 mm x 220 mm) (107 mm x 215 mm)

C5 6.38" x 9.01" 6.24" x 8.88"(162 mm x 229 mm) (158 mm x 226 mm)

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-7

If the extra wide print option is installed, the imageable area for12.00" (305 mm) wide media is increased.

Standard Extra WideMedia Size Imageable Area Imageable Area

12.00" x 19.00" 11.63" x 18.87" 11.95" x 18.87"(305 mm x 483 mm) (295 mm x 479 mm) (304 mm x 479 mm)

12.00" x 25.00" 11.63" x 24.87" 11.95" x 24.87"(305 mm x 635 mm) (295 mm x 632 mm) (304 mm x 632 mm)

Set the page margins in your applications to fit within the imageableareas. If you try to print outside the imageable area, many applicationsissue a warning message, giving you an opportunity to make changes;some applications, however, clip the image and print the page.

XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes

The following chart lists Myriad film sizes. To order Myriad film,call XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8393 from the US andCanada or at 334-342-4846 from other locations.

Myriad Film Myriad FilmPart Number Size

200-100001 8.50" x 11.00"(216 mm x 279 mm)

200-100002 8.26" x 11.69"(210 mm x 297 mm)

200-100003 11.00" x 17.00"(279 mm x 432 mm)

200-100004 11.69" x 16.54"(297 mm x 420 mm)

200-100005 10.00" x 15.00"(254 mm x 381 mm)

200-100006 11.70" x 18.00"(297 mm x 457 mm)

200-100007 12.00" x 18.00"(305 mm x 457 mm)

200-100008 12.00" x 25.00"(305 mm x 635 mm)

7-8 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

Feeding Media to the PrinterUse the paper cassettes to feed standard size paper. Use the manualfeed tray for non-standard or oversized media, film, transparencies,envelopes, labels, or when printing limited quantities.

Determining the Leading Edge

The leading edge of the media is determined by the media size andthe feeding source. Use the following chart to determine the leadingedge.

Domestic International ManualMedia Size Cassette Cassette Feed Tray

A3 — Short ShortA4 — Long LongB4 — Short ShortB5 — Long Long

Letter Long — LongLegal Short — ShortLedger Short — Short

Executive LongP15 — ShortP18 — Short

12" x 19" — Short12" x 25" — ShortEnvelope — Short

* Short = Short Edge First, Long = Long Edge First

The Paper Cassettes

One 250 sheet paper cassette ships with your printer. The NorthAmerican paper cassette is set up to feed letter, legal, 11" x 17", andexecutive paper sizes. The international paper cassette is set up tofeed A4, A3, A5, B5, and B4 paper sizes.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-9

You can install up to two additional paper feeders, each of whichcan hold a 250 sheet cassette. With three paper cassettes and themanual feed tray, your printer’s capacity is expanded to 850 sheets.

The paper cassettes and manual feed tray can be used to increase thecapacity for a single media size with the tray chaining option or assources for different sizes or types of print media. For example, touse both letter and ledger size media, load up to 250 sheets of onesize in the standard cassette and 250 sheets of the other size in theoptional cassette.

Select the appropriate paper cassette as the media source using thefront panel Tray Select key, or select tray chaining using the frontpanel Tray Switch menu (see chapter 5 for information about frontpanel configuration and chapter 2 for information about installingand loading the paper cassettes and optional paper feeder).

The Manual Feed Tray

Your printer’s built-in manual feed tray is designed to feed up to 100sheets of standard letter/A4, B5, legal/special A4, ledger/A3,oversized paper, up to 25 sheets of Myriad Film, up to 50transparencies, or up to 40 label sheets. Custom size media,including envelopes, that measure from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) can be fed from themanual feed tray. Use the printer’s tray extender to support the largermedia.

Select the manual feed tray as the media source using the Tray Selectkey on the printer’s front panel or through the print dialog box inyour application. If the manual feed tray is loaded with the same sizemedia as the paper cassettes, it can be used as a media source for traychaining (see chapter 5 for information about front panelconfiguration and chapter 2 for information about loading the manualfeed tray).

7-10 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

Tray Chaining

Tray chaining directs the printer to automatically switch to anothersource for media when the current source is empty. With the Accel-a-Writer 8300, you can chain to all paper cassettes and the manualfeed tray.

To enable the tray chaining feature

• All selected media sources must contain the same size media. Ifthe printer detects a different size media when it switches to anew tray, a PAPER OUT message appears.

• All trays must be properly inserted. When tray chaining isenabled, an incorrectly positioned tray will prevent the printerfrom printing.

• Select the tray chaining feature from your application’s Printdialog box (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”).

• To change the printer’s default tray chaining option, use the frontpanel Tray Switch menu (see chapter 5, “Configuration”).

Using Special MediaBe sure that all media used in your XANTÉ printer meets the guidelineslisted in “Media Specifications” earlier in the chapter. When printing tospecial media, such as Myriad film, envelopes, or custom sized media,always use the manual feed tray. See “The Manual Feed Tray” earlier inthis chapter and in chapter 2 for details.

Printing Computer-to-Film

You can print directly to XANTÉ’s Myriad Film, a specially designed,semitransparent film with low UV blockage. When processed throughFilmStar 2, which increases the transmissive density of the toner on thefilm to 3.3, the image on Myriad film can be used to burn metal platesand silk-screen emulsions, bypassing the camera and darkroom steps.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-11

Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following pointers inmind when printing on film.

• Use only XANTÉ’s Myriad film. It is designed specifically foruse with your printer and FilmStar 2. Using other film materialmay void your printer warranty.

• Limit film handling to prevent fingerprints and scratches.

• Keep the paper path clean (see chapter 9 for cleaning details). Dustand dirt can scratch film or reduce print quality.

• Load fewer sheets of film if jams occur.

• Remove film as it is printed to help prevent static build-up.

• Do not fan direct film materials. This causes staticbuild-up which can cause jams.

• Select a gamma correction curve from the Gamma menu on yourprinter’s front panel or your application’s print dialog box toadjust output.

• Once an image is printed on Myriad Film, the side with toner isthe emulsion side for FilmStar 2 processing. The film is loadedinto FilmStar 2 with the emulsion side up.

Printing Transparencies

Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following pointers inmind when printing on transparencies.

• Avoid handling transparencies to prevent fingerprints and scratches.

• Keep the paper path clean (see chapter 9 for cleaning details). Dustor dirt can scratch transparencies and reduce the print quality.

• Load 50 sheets or less, making sure the stack does not exceed theupper paper limit tabs on the side guides of the manual feed tray.

• Load fewer transparencies if jams occur. The weight of a stackof transparencies could cause the sheets to stick together.

• Remove each transparency as it prints to help prevent staticbuild-up.

7-12 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

• Do not fan transparencies. This causes static build-up which cancause jams.

• Select a gamma correction curve from the Gamma menu on yourprinter’s front panel or your application’s print dialog box toadjust output.

Printing Envelopes

Although your printer is not designed to run large numbers ofenvelopes, you can print them individually.

Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following in mindwhen printing envelopes.

• Before loading the envelope, place it on a flat surface and press itsmooth to make the corners and folds as flat as possible.

• Run the envelope with the flap closed, and then open it as soonas it emerges from the printer. This prevents the heat duringprinting from sealing the envelope.

• Format envelopes in your application and run a test print onplain paper to check alignment of the flap before running on themore expensive envelope stock.

Printing Labels

Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following in mindwhen printing labels.

• Load 40 sheets or fewer, making sure the stack does not exceed theupper paper limit tabs on the side guides of the manual feed tray.

• Make sure the sheets do not become packed down as they areloaded into the manual feed tray. Sheets compressed by theweight of stack will expand as they are fed into the printer whichcan cause a jam.

• Make sure labels are not curled on the corners or coming loosefrom the backing sheet.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-13

• Do not use label sheets with exposed adhesives (such as partiallyused sheets or sheets on which the adhesive has seeped throughto the surface).

• Do not use thick, rough, textured, coated, syntheticallyreinforced, curled, torn, or otherwise damaged label stock.

• Format your labels in your application and run a test print onplain paper to check alignment before running on the moreexpensive label stock.

Printing on Custom Sized Media

The Adobe PostScript printer drivers supplied with the XANTÉUtilities disks allow you to print on media from 3.90" x 5.80" (99mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm). Oversizeprinting allows you to print 11" x 17"/A3 (279 mm x 432 mm) fullsize bleeds.

Set the custom page size through your application. Be sure that thepaper size selections in the page or document setup section agreewith those in the Print dialog box to ensure that the page printscorrectly.

If the extra wide print option is installed, the imageable area for12.00" (305 mm) wide media is increased (see “Media Sizes” earlierin this chapter). Be sure to set the page margins in your applicationsto fit within the imageable areas.

Use only media that meets the guidelines listed in “MediaSpecifications” earlier in this chapter. Always feed custom sizedmedia from the manual feed tray following the instructions in“Feeding Media to the Printer” earlier in this chapter and “TheManual Feed Tray” in chapter 2.

7-14 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

The following chart lists the minimum memory configurationrequired to print to oversized media.

Minimum Memory Requirements

Media Size 600 dpi 1200 dpi

12.00" x 19.00" (305 mm x 483 mm) 8 MB 20 MB12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) 16 MB 32 MB11.25" x 18.50" (286 mm x 470 mm) 8 MB 20 MB

Some complex, large files or those with heavy graphics may requireadditional memory to print.

If a virtual memory error occurs, there is not enough printer memoryto process the job. To resolve the situation

• Add more memory to your printer.

• Print at a lower resolution.

• Use only printer resident fonts.

For more information on memory requirements, see “PrinterMemory Requirements” in chapter 9.

Printing Double-Sided CopyYou can print double-sided copy manually by feeding the mediathrough the printer twice or automatically with the optional duplexer.

Manual Double-Sided Copy

1. Print the first side using either the manual feed tray or thepaper cassette.

2. Remove the media from the output tray, straighten any curlingedges, and allow it to cool thoroughly.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-15

3. Load the media using the following guidelines:

Note: For best results when printing on the second side ofthe media, we recommend that you feed sheetsindividually or slip-feed (feed a blank sheet betweeneach printed sheet) to prevent toner from sticking toadjacent pages.

a. Determine the leading edge of the media (see “FeedingMedia to the Printer” earlier in this chapter).

b. Print a test page and check your software documentationto determine the orientation of the top edge of the media.

c. Load the media into the cassette or manual feed traywith the blank side of the sheet in the print side position(see “Feeding Media to the Printer” earlier in thischapter).

4. Print the second side.

Duplexing

The optional duplexer allows you to print double-sided copyautomatically, rather than by feeding pages manually.

You can use the duplexer for 64-90 g/m2 weight A3, B4, A4, B5,letter, ledger, legal, and executive size plain paper, fed from eitherthe standard or the optional cassette.

Follow the guidelines in “Media Specifications” earlier in thischapter. We recommend that you avoid using recycled paper. Ittends to absorb moisture easily which can cause the paper to wrinkleor fold at the corners. This can cause jams.

Printer memory requirements for duplexing vary according to themedia size and print resolution selected. See “Printer MemoryRequirements” in chapter 9 for details.

7-16 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

See “Paper Handling Options” in chapter 2 for instructions oninstalling, removing, and storing the duplexer. See Appendix A,“Troubleshooting” for solutions to paper jam and print quality issues.

Using the Duplexer

You can select from the three duplexing options using either theDuplex key on the printer’s front panel or the PPD option in yourapplication’s Print dialog box.

• Simplex is standard printing on one side of the page.

• Edge-duplex is double-sided printing in edge to edgebook style (fig. 7.2).

• Tumble-duplex is double-sided printing in a flip chart style(fig. 7.2).

Edge Duplex(Side-by-side)

Tumble Duplex(Flip Chart)

Fig. 7.2 Edge and Tumble Duplexing.

The Duplex key allows you to scroll through the options in thedisplay window. The Duplex LED is lit when either Edge-duplex orTumble-duplex is selected.

The duplexer must be configured as an option in the PPD before youcan select it through the Print dialog box. See chapter 3, (Macintosh) orchapter 4, (PC) for instructions on configuring the PPD. See chapter 6,“PPD Settings,” for details about selecting PPD options.

________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-17

Handling the Toner CartridgeYour printer uses a standard toner cartridge that combines the tonerand the drum, so you only have to replace one consumable. Thetoner cartridge averages 8000 letter/A4 size copies at 4% coverage.

When you handle the toner cartridge, keep the following in mind:

• Never move the printer with the toner cartridge installed.

• The toner cartridge is sensitive to bright lights and directsunlight. Leave it in its protective bag until you are ready to loadit into the printer.

• The cartridge contains a magnet, so keep it away from your harddisk(s) and monitor to prevent possible data loss.

• When you store the cartridge, keep it lengthwise on a levelsurface, not on end or upside-down.

• Use a cartridge before its expiration date to maintain maximumprint quality.

• Unopened cartridge packages have a shelf life of approximately2 1/2 years of storage plus usage. An opened cartridge packagehas a shelf life of approximately 6 months storage plus usage.

• We recommend you use only new toner cartridges. Refilled tonercartridges may vary in quality and reliability, and toner leakscould affect your printer warranty.

• Because toner settles during prolonged storage, a break in run ofup to 50 copies may be required for new toner cartridges.

• If you do not use the printer for a week or two, you may need torun 3 or 4 copies to loosen the toner. For longer periods, youmay need to remove the cartridge and gently rock it back andforth to redistribute the toner in the cartridge.

See “The Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for installation andreplacement instructions.

7-18 Using Media and Tonerb________________________________

Adjusting Toner Output

If your printer does not produce the rich, black images that youexpect, the toner may have settled in the cartridge or you may needto adjust the print density.

Redistributing TonerIf the toner cartridge has not been used in several days, the toner mayhave settled in the cartridge. Remove the toner cartridge from theprinter, gently rock it back and forth to redistribute the tonerthroughout the cartridge, and then replace it in the printer. “TheToner Cartridge” in chapter 2 contains instructions and illustrationsfor this process.

Changing the Density MenuIf redistributing the toner in the cartridge does not resolve the problem,you can lighten or darken the amount of toner laid down by the printerthrough the front panel Density menu. The options are 1 through 7.Increasing the numeric setting increases the density of the toner applied.See chapter 5 for instructions on using the front panel menus.

Note: Check the Density menu setting when you replace a tonercartridge. The setting required for the previous cartridge maybe too high or low for the new cartridge. We suggestswitching back to the factory default of 5.

◊◊◊

____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-1

Chapter 8- Advanced Features

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................8-3Levels of Gray ................................................................................. 8-3Line Screens ....................................................................................8-4Scanner Resolutions ........................................................................8-4

Line Art Scanning ..................................................................... 8-4Halftone Scanning .................................................................... 8-5TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats ......................................................... 8-5

Gamma Corrections ........................................................................8-6Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology........................................8-8Enhanced Screening ........................................................................8-8RAM Enhance ................................................................................. 8-9Font Accelerator and RAM Disk ..................................................8-10Accurate Calibration Technology .................................................8-11

8-2 Advanced Features ____________________________________

Notes

____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-3

IntroductionTo take full advantage of your printer’s high resolution and makeyour images look their best, it is important that you understand levelsof gray, line screens, scanner resolutions, scanned image formats,and their uses within specific applications.

This chapter explains these concepts and describes how to use themwith XANTÉ’s Enhanced Screening Technology, NEIT, XANTÉ’sHalftone Calibration Technology, to achieve the best quality inoutput.

Levels of GrayA laser printer’s resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). Thestandard resolution on your printer is 600 x 600 dpi, which you mayhave upgraded to 1200 x 1200 dpi.

The human eye can detect approximately 256 shades of gray. Themore levels of gray (number of shades) produced in a halftoneimage, the smoother the image appears.

The following simple formula can help you determine the shades ofgray used to produce an image:

dots per inch

lines per inch

For example, if you print at 600 x 600 dpi with a 60 line screen, theimage produced has 101 levels of gray (600/60 = 10; 10 x 10 + 1 =101). For more levels of gray at 600 dpi, the line screen or lines perinch (lpi) has to be reduced.

The higher the lines per inch, the tighter the screen on the image willbe. To produce higher levels of gray without using a lower linescreen, you must print at a higher dpi.

( )2 +1

8-4 Advanced Features ____________________________________

Use the following table as a guide to produce 256 levels of gray.

LPI To Achieve 256 Levels of Gray

PrinterResolution LPI

1200 x 1200 dpi 75600 x 600 dpi 38

Line ScreensThe number of levels of gray you would like to achieve is one factorin determining the appropriate line screen to use. You do not alwayshave to achieve 256 levels of gray for the best output. Someexperimentation usually is necessary to produce the best possibleoutput.

We found that line screens (lpi) of 85 for 600 dpi and 85 - 106 for1200 dpi work well for most images. Try these line screen settings orchoose the number of gray levels to produce using XANTÉ’sEnhanced Screening Technology (see “Enhanced Screening” later inthis chapter).

Scanner ResolutionsAnother way to insure high quality output for your images is todetermine the optimum scanning resolution.

Line Art Scanning

For line art, the optimum scanning resolution would be at the sameresolution as the output device, especially when reproduced at thesame size. For example, when printing from your printer in the 600dpi mode, the scanner resolution should be set at 600 dpi.

____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-5

Halftone Scanning

The halftone scanning resolution is usually lower than that of theoutput resolution. Black and white images generally should bescanned at a resolution of 2 times that of the line screen used, ifprinting at 100% size. Use the following formula to determine theoptimum resolution.

desired lpi x 2 x % of original size

For example, if a line screen of 95 is used, the scanner resolutionshould be set to 190 dpi (95 x 2). If that resolution cannot beselected, choose the next higher resolution available. If the previousexample were to be printed at 75% of original size, then the scannerresolution should be set to 142 dpi (95 x 2 x .75).

Scanning the image at a lower than optimum resolution results in lessdetail. Scanning at a higher resolution increases the file size and theprocessing time, and it may only slightly increase the amount ofdetail.

TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats

After creating or scanning the image, you need to decide the formatin which to save it. The three most common formats are TIFF(Tagged Image File Format), PICT (from Picture), and EPS(Encapsulated PostScript) files. If you use a scanning applicationsuch as Photoshop, make sure to choose the appropriate line screenunder Page Setup before saving the image. This is essential forimporting the image into other applications. Some programs do notallow you to change the line screen of an individual PICT or EPSimage once it is imported.

PageMaker only allows you to change the line screen of a TIFF file byclicking the image and choosing Image Control under the Elementsmenu. For version specific information, see your PageMakerdocumentation.

8-6 Advanced Features ____________________________________

QuarkXPress only allows you to change the line screen of anindividual TIFF file through the Style menu. For version specificinformation, see the QuarkXPress documentation.

For additional application information, see appendix B, “ApplicationNotes and Page Design.”

Gamma CorrectionsXANTÉ Halftone Calibration Technology includes a sophisticatedgamma corrections feature. This feature allows you to adjust printeroutput for ink, media, file, and environmental conditions. For example,if a scanned image is too dark, you can select a new gamma setting tolighten and enhance the details. Gamma corrections bring out detailsthat can be lost when printing at higher line screens or when dark photosare scanned.

Your printer offers seven standard gamma correction curves, 0 (nochange) through 6 with 3 as the default. Settings 0 through 5progressively lighten the midrange values. Gamma 6 allows you tocreate a negative (reverse) image, (required by some printingprocesses) without using a software application. Figure 8.1 illustratesthe effects of the standard gamma correction settings.

You also can create and download up to seven custom gamma curvesto calibrate your printer for specific conditions. Custom GammaCurve 0 can be selected as the printer’s default gamma correctioncurve using the Linear option of the front panel Gamma menu. See“The Gamma Menu” in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and“Calibration with a Densitometer” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) orchapter 4 (PC).

All fourteen gamma correction curves can be selected on a per jobbasis through the printer features section of the PPD. The PPDsetting overrides the front panel setting for the specific job.

If you use gamma corrections in combination with XANTÉ’s newenhanced screening technology, you can further fine tune youroutput quality. See “Levels of Gray” earlier in this chapter and“Enhanced Screening,” later in this chapter.

____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-7

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 6

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 5

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 4

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 3

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 2

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

sB

lack

Whi

te

Input Levels

Gamma 1

Black White

1

10

Out

put L

evel

s

Gamma 0

Bla

ckW

hite

Input LevelsBlack White

Fig. 8.1 Gamma Corrections 0 through 6

8-8 Advanced Features ____________________________________

Negative Enhanced Imaging TechnologyTraditionally laser printers were designed to print positive images.XANTÉ’s innovative, patent pending Negative Enhanced ImagingTechnology (NEIT) is the first technology to address the problemstypically associated with producing negative images on a laser printer.The patent pending technology can be purchased as an option for yourprinter.

Previously, when a negative print was done on a laser printer, grayscales were distorted and small spaces in text and lines wereobscured by toner bleed. NEIT addresses these problems, allowingyou to adjust the application of toner when producing a negativeimage to produce crisp, clean lines and text. The image on the rightin figure 8.2 illustrates how NEIT can improve a negative print.

Fig. 8.2 The NEIT Difference

XANTÉ’s optional NEIT feature is controlled through theMISCELLANEOUS:NEIT menu on the printer’s front panel. NEITmenu settings are activated only when you select True in theNegative Print option of the PPD. The options are 0 to 20; increasingthe number decreases the amount of plugging (filling in) of tinywhite spaces in text and hairlines on negative images. See “TheNEIT Menu” in chapter 5 and “Negative Print” in chapter 6.

Note: NEIT requires full frame buffering. See “Printer MemoryRequirements” in chapter 9.

____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-9

Enhanced ScreeningXANTÉ’s Enhanced Screening Technology increases the number ofgray levels available for a line screen setting. The option can be setfrom the printer’s front panel or through the PPD.

If you use the PPD, you can select the levels of gray and gammasettings simultaneously. Gray level and line screen combinations ofenhanced screens are defined as:

Levels Line Screensof Gray 600 dpi 1200 dpi

145 70 140197 60 120256 53 106

Font Accelerator and RAM DiskFont Accelerator uses a percentage of available RAM disk to storefonts for quick system access. Font Accelerator automatically loadsthe most recently used fonts from the printer’s optional hard disk intothe RAM disk. This eliminates time usually required to access fontsfrom the hard disk.

The feature can be enabled only on systems with 12 MB or more ofRAM, an optional hard disk, and with RAM disk set to at least 1MB. See the “Font Accelerator Menu” and “The RAM Disk Menu”in chapter 5. The printer must be restarted before Font Acceleratorbecomes active.

Once Font Accelerator is active, it automatically updates the RAMdisk at runtime with the most recently used fonts. This update occurswhen the printer is in a READY/IDLE state. The front panel windowdisplays READY/FONT ACCEL during the update.

8-10 Advanced Features ____________________________________

The maximum amount of RAM disk available is equal to the totalRAM installed minus the amount of RAM required for standardprinter operation (a minimum of 8 MB). For example, a printer with64 MB of RAM has 56 MB (64 - 8 = 56) available. RAM disk can beenabled in 1 MB increments up to the maximum available amount. Theprinter's default is 0, which disables RAM disk.

Note: When RAM disk is set high, the initialization process can beextended at start-up.

Accurate Calibration TechnologyX•ACT (XANTÉ’s patent pending Accurate Calibration Technology)allows you to calibrate the printer to print more precise horizontal andvertical lines.

Because of manufacturing variations and usage, a printer may notprint lines with the exact dimensions specified by the application.X•ACT allows you to calibrate your printer to compensates for thesedifferences.

Your printer is calibrated before it is shipped, but it may drift out ofalignment over time. After using X•ACT to calibrate the line lengths,adjust the alignment of the imageable area on the page usingCommand Center. See “Procedures” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) orchapter 4 (PC) for details on using X•ACT and your printer’s marginalignment functions.

◊ ◊ ◊

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-1

Chapter 9 - Maintenance andSpecifications

Chapter OverviewIntroduction .....................................................................................9-3Maintenance ....................................................................................9-3

Handling the Printer ................................................................. 9-3Moving the Printer .................................................................... 9-4Cleaning the Printer .................................................................. 9-5

Technical Specifications.................................................................. 9-7Printer Memory Requirements .................................................9-9

Warranty and Service Options ...................................................... 9-10Limited Warranty ..........................................................................9-11

9-2 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

Notes

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-3

IntroductionYour Accel-a-Writer 8300 is designed for minimal maintenance.This chapter describes how to care for your printer and contains thetechnical specifications and warranty for your printer.

MaintenanceYour printer requires minimal maintenance. Handling the printerwith care and regular cleaning should ensure that it remains in goodworking order.

Handling the Printer

Always treat your printer with care. Proper care can extend the lifeof the printer. When you are handling your printer, keep thefollowing things in mind:

• Never move the printer with the toner cartridge installed.

• Do not place anything on top of the printer.

• Always have someone help you lift the printer. It weighsapproximately 44 lbs (19.98 kg).

• Always lift the printer by the bottom—never by the cartridgeslot or manual feed tray.

• Only use media which meets all the printer’s requirements. See“Media Specifications” in chapter 7 for details.

• Make sure the printer’s location meets the requirements listed in“Printer Location” in chapter 2.

• Protect the printer from strong vibrations or jostling.

• Do not open the front cover while printing. This may cause apaper jam.

• Never oil the printer.

9-4 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

• Make sure that air vents are not covered and that air can movefreely around them. Never insert anything into the vents.

• Make sure the output tray does not overfill. Overfilling can blockmedia as it comes out and cause a printer jam.

• If the printer will not be used for an extended period (overseveral days), unplug the power cord from the power source,close the manual feed tray, and cover the printer with protectiveplastic or a cloth.

• Store the printer only in an area with a temperature of 32˚ to 95˚F (0˚ to 35˚ C) and a relative humidity of 10% to 80% with nocondensation.

Moving the Printer

Use the following guidelines when moving the printer.

• Never move the printer with the toner cartridge installed.Remove the cartridge and place it in its original bag to protect itfrom light. If you no longer have this bag, place the cartridge in adark bag or wrap it in a dark cloth.

• Make sure the toner cartridge stays level during the move. Then,rock it gently to redistribute toner before placing the cartridgeback in the printer. For details, see “Handling the TonerCartridge” in chapter 7.

• Make sure the top cover and manual feed tray are closed.

• Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

• If a SCSI disk is attached, remove it.

• Always have help when you lift the printer. It weighsapproximately 44 lbs. (19.98 kg).

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-5

Cleaning the Printer

Your printer requires minimal cleaning. The most convenient time toclean the printer is when you install a new toner cartridge.

To clean your printer

1. Turn off your printer and disconnect it from the power source.

2. Remove the toner cartridge. (See “The Toner Cartridge” inchapter 2 for details.)

3. Locate the static charge eliminator and clean any paper dust orscrap residue from it using the green cleaning brush locatedinside the top cover area on the left (fig. 10.1). To do this,gently run the brush back and forth across the eliminatorseveral times.

Fig. 10.1 Clean the Static Charge Area

9-6 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

4. Locate the transfer guide and clean off any dust and paperresidue by wiping the area with a soft, dry, lint-free, cleancloth (fig. 10.2).

Fig. 10.2 Clean the Transfer Guide

5. Install the new toner cartridge and close the printer. (See “TheToner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.)

6. Clean the printer’s exterior using a clean, lint-free clothdampened with water, denatured alcohol, or a mild,water-based detergent.

Caution: Never use ammonia-based cleaners on or aroundthe printer. This may cause permanent damage tothe toner cartridge or to the printer’s plastic case.Never spray or pour solutions directly on theprinter. Always put the solution on the cloth andwipe the printer with the cloth. Make sure thesolution does not get inside the printer, ports, orpower cord areas.

7. Give the printer a few minutes for any damp areas to drythoroughly. Then, reconnect the printer to the power source.

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-7

Technical SpecificationsType: Laser printer; AMD 29040/33 MHz RISC

processor

Engine: Canon JX; 8 pages–per–minute (letter)

Power: Supply: 100-120 volts; 3.5 amps; 385 wattsConsumption: Max. 755 W

Noise Level: Printing: less than 49 dBStandby: less than 37 dB

Dimensions: (W) 17.3" (440 mm)(D) 17.9" (457 mm)(H) 11.1" (282 mm)(H) 14.9" (379 mm) with media feeder

Weight: 33 lbs (15 kg)

Environment: 50˚ to 90.5˚ Fahrenheit (10˚ to 32.5˚ Celsius)and 20% to 80% relative humidity withoutrapid changes; Air Pressure 760-1013 hpa(570-760 mmHg)

Language: Adobe PostScript 3

Typefaces: 136 PostScript fontsTypes 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 PostScript downloadfont support

Interfaces: Standard: LocalTalk, Centronics parallel,RS232 serial, and SCSI disk interfaceOptional: Ethernet (EtherTalk, NovellNetWare, TCP/IP)

Resolutions: 600 x 600 dpi; (1200 x 1200 dpi upgrade)

Memory: 8 MB RAM (4, 16, and 32 MB SIMMupgrades to 128 MB)

9-8 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

Media size: 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00"x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm)

XANTÉ Features: XANTÉ Halftone Calibration TechnologyXANTÉ Enhanced Screening TechnologyXANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology(X•ACT), patent pendingXANTÉ Negative Enhanced ImagingTechnology (NEIT), patent pending

Toner cartridge: 8,000 sheets (letter; 4% coverage)

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-9

Printer Memory Requirements

Memory requirements vary depending on the print resolution, mediasize, and duplexing mode. Negative image and NEIT printing requirefull image buffering.

The following chart lists the minimum available memory required toprint typical configurations. Available memory is equal to the totalRAM installed minus the amount of RAM Disk enabled (see chapter8 for details). Complex files, large files or those with heavy graphicsmay require more than the standard memory to print.

Minimum Memory RequirementsMedia Duplex Race Compress◊ Full Image

600 dpi 1200 dpi† 600 dpi 1200 dpi† 600 dpi 1200 dpi†

COM10 Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

C5 Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

DL Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

Monarch Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

B5 12MB 28MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

Letter/A4 12MB 40MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

Executive 12MB 32MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

B4 16MB 52MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 28MB

Legal 16MB 48MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 28MB

11x17/Leger/A3 20MB 80MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 40MB

12" x 18" N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 16MB 40MB

12" x 19" N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 16MB 48MB

12" x 20" N/A N/A 16MB 28MB 16MB 48MB

12" x 21" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 16MB 48MB

12" x 23" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 16MB 52MB

12" x 25" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 20MB 64MB◊ If your printer has enough RAM available for full frame imaging, racecompression is not used.

† 1200 dpi is not available unless the resolution upgrade and a minimum of20 MB of RAM is available.

9-10 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

Warranty and Service OptionsWe recommend that only XANTÉ trained service engineers performservice on your printer. XANTÉ offers several service plans,designed to meet your business needs. You can choose XANTÉ’sCustomer Return Service, which is an extension of the one yearlimited warranty; Depot Service; Cross-Ship Service, or RightSite,XANTÉ’s on-site service plan.

XANTÉ provides a one year limited warranty against defects inmaterial and workmanship on your printer (see “Limited Warranty”later in this chapter). To obtain warranty service, call customersupport for an RGA (Return Goods Authorization) number andreturn your printer to the XANTÉ Customer Repair Center, freightprepaid. XANTÉ repairs or replaces your printer within five businessdays, to locations within the United States and Canada. You maypurchase multiple year extensions to this plan.

The Depot Service plan allows you to drop off or ship your printer tothe designated Olivetti Customer Repair Center near you. Yourprinter will be repaired and returned to you, freight prepaid, withinten business days from the date of receipt.

With XANTÉ’s Cross-Ship Service, you receive a temporaryreplacement printer via prepaid priority shipment. Your printer canthen be sent to XANTÉ, repaired, and returned to you, freightprepaid. After you receive your repaired printer, you return thereplacement printer to XANTÉ.

XANTÉ’s RightSite is a comprehensive on-site service planprovided by XANTÉ and Olivetti North America within the UnitedStates and Canada. With this plan, if you are within 50 miles of thenearest Olivetti Customer Repair Center, a trained service technicianis dispatched to your site by the end of the next business day to beginservicing your printer.

To learn the details of these plans or to request service under one ofthese plans, call XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8839 in theUS and Canada or at 334-342-4846 elsewhere.

_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-11

Limited WarrantyXANTÉ CORPORATION warrants this product against defects in materialand workmanship for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of originalpurchase of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer.

In case of defect, XANTÉ CORPORATION will, at its option, repair, orreplace this product at no charge to you provided you return the product,freight prepaid, to us during the warranty period. Please attach your name,address, telephone number, a description of the problem, and proof of dateof original purchase. This warranty does not apply if the product has beendamaged by accident, abuse, misuse, misapplication, or if the product hasbeen modified without the written permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.

XANTÉ CORPORATION IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL,INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTINGFROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, OR UNDER ANY OTHERLEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENTAND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING,REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATASTORED IN OR USED WITH XANTÉ CORPORATION PRODUCTS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental orconsequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warrantylasts, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. Thiswarranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rightswhich vary from state to state.

ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE (1) YEAR FROMTHE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OF THE ACCEL-A-WRITER8300.

THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEUOF ALL OTHERS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

9-12 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

Effect of Consumables on WarrantyWe recommend you use only XANTÉ parts and consumables in yourAccel-a-Writer 8300 printer. To order parts and consumables fromXANTÉ call Customer Support at 800-926-8393 in the US andCanada or 334-342-4846 elsewhere.

Your warranty and maintenance contracts are not affected by usingnon-XANTÉ products. However, any damages resulting from orrepairs required due to use of non-XANTÉ products are not covered;if this happens, time and materials costs are charged.

◊ ◊ ◊

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-1

Appendix A

Troubleshooting

Appendix OverviewIntroduction .................................................................................... A-3Troubleshooting ............................................................................. A-3

Jams ......................................................................................... A-3Status Messages ..................................................................... A-12Preliminary Troubleshooting ................................................. A-14Miscellaneous Troubleshooting ............................................. A-16Print Quality Troubleshooting ............................................... A-19

Calling for Technical Support ...................................................... A-24Troubleshooting Information ................................................. A-25XANTÉ Phone Support ......................................................... A-25XANTÉ Fax Support ............................................................. A-26XANTÉ Bulletin Board Support ........................................... A-26XANTÉ Internet Support ...................................................... A-26

A-2 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

Notes

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-3

IntroductionThis chapter provides suggestions for troubleshooting printerhardware problems and information about XANTÉ support services.

TroubleshootingThe troubleshooting section can help you correct most printerhardware problems. It covers printer jams, status messages, apreliminary troubleshooting procedure, and miscellaneous and printquality problems.

Jams

This section covers preventing and clearing media jams.

Preventing JamsMany jams are the result of using the wrong consumables, eithertoner or media, and handling the consumables incorrectly. Thefollowing tips can help avoid these types of jams.

• Make sure all media meets the guidelines in “MediaSpecifications” in chapter 7.

• Make sure media is stored following the guidelines in “StoringMedia” in chapter 7.

• Make sure the correct size media is loaded in the selectedcassette or manual feed tray.

• When printing on various media, always follow the guidelines inthe corresponding sections of chapter 7, such as in “PrintingComputer-to-Film” or “Printing on Custom Sized Media.”

• Make sure all media is in good condition—not torn, wrinkled,curled, or damp.

A-4 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

• Never overfill cassettes or the manual feed tray. The cassetteshold approximately 250 sheets of plain or laser paper. Themanual feed tray holds approximately 100 sheets of laser or 20lb bond/60 lb text weight paper, 50 transparencies, 40 labelsheets, or 25 sheets of Myriad film. Make sure stock does notexceed upper limit marks on the cassette or manual feed tray.

• Always load the cassette media print-side down and the manualfeed tray media print-side up.

• Make sure the output tray’s paper stop is up when you printoversized media.

• Empty the output tray when it gets full to prevent media in thetray from blocking media as it exits the printer.

• Use XANTÉ supplied toner.

• Use XANTÉ Myriad film.

• Do not use refilled toner cartridges.

• Handle and store toner cartridges following the guidelines in“The Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 and “Handling the TonerCartridge” in chapter 7.

• Keep the printer clean. See “Cleaning the Printer” in chapter 9.

Clearing JamsJams occur along the paper path in the areas illustrated in figure A.1Since media jams can occur in several areas at the same time, youneed to check the full paper path.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-5

Fig. A.1 The Printer Paper Path

To fix media jams

1. Check the paper cassette area for a jam. If found, use thefollowing procedure to clear the jam.

a. Remove the cassette.

b. If you find a jam, remove the media (fig. A.2) from thecassette slot. If you use two cassettes and cannot removea jam from the lower cassette slot, remove it through theupper cassette slot.

Fig. A.2 Remove Media from the Cassette Area

A-6 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

2. Check the manual feed tray for a jam. If found, pull the mediastraight out from the tray.

Fig. A.3 Remove Media from the Manual Feed Tray Area

3. Open the back cover and check for a jam. If found, use thefollowing procedure to clear the jam.

a. Locate the green pressure release lever on the right andpull it up (fig. A.4).

b. Pull the media gently out of the printer (fig. A.4).

PressureReleaseLever

Fig. A.4 Remove Media from the Back Cover Area

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-7

4. Check the output tray for a jam. If found, pull the media outfrom the output tray (fig. A.5).

Fig. A.5 Remove Media from the Output Tray

5. Check the toner cartridge area for a jam using the followingprocedure.

a. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch andtilting the cover up and back (fig. 2.1).

b. Remove the toner cartridge by pulling it up and out (fig.2.21).

A-8 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

c. Grasp the green lever on the paper access door and liftup and back (fig. A.6).

d. Check for a jam; if found, gently pull the jammed mediaout (fig. A.6).

Green Lever on Paper Access Door

Fig. A.6 Remove Media from the Toner Cartridge Area

e. Close the paper access door.

f. Align the toner cartridge on the runners inside theprinter, and slide the cartridge into the printer until itrests securely in place (fig. 2.26).

g. Close the printer’s top cover; it will click in place.

6. Resume printing from your application.

Note: Your printer has an automatic jam recovery feature. If thefeature is enabled and a multiple page job jams, as long asyou do not turn off the printer to remove the jam, the printerreprints the jammed page and the rest of the job. See “TheJam Recover Menu” in chapter 5 for details.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-9

Clearing Duplexer JamsJams occur in the back unit, between the back unit and printer, and inthe bottom area of the printer (fig. A.7).

Fig. A.7 The Duplexer Paper Path

To clear duplexer jams

1. Open the printer’s top cover (fig. 2.1) and remove the tonercartridge (fig. 2.21).

Caution: If the toner cartridge does not come out easily, donot force it. Cover the cartridge with a dark clothor its wrapper to protect it from light while it is outof the printer.

2. Remove the printer’s paper cassette by pulling it straight out.

3. Check the back unit for a jam using the following procedure.

a. Open the duplexer’s top cover by lifting its release latchand tilting the cover up and back.

A-10 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

b. Check for a jam; if found, gently pull the jammed mediaup and out (fig. A.8). Then, close the top cover.

12

Fig. A.8 Remove Media from the Back Unit

4. Check the area between the back unit and printer for a jamusing the following procedure.

a. Pull out the back cover release latch and slide the backunit open as far as it will go (fig. 2.12).

b. Look for the jam; if found, pull the jammed mediaforward, up, and out (fig. A.9).

Fig. A.9 Remove Media from between the Back Unit and Printer

c. Close the duplexer by sliding it back into place, makingsure the back unit fits against the printer.

Note: Leaving a gap between the duplexer’s back unitand the printer will cause another paper jam orprevent the duplexer from operating properly. Amessage of Cover Open or Paper Jamappears in the window.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-11

5. Check the bottom area of the printer for a jam using thefollowing procedure.

a. Pull the jam handling tray out approximately two inchesfrom the front of the printer. Then, lift up to remove it(fig. A.10).

1

Fig. A.10 Remove the Jam Handling Tray

b. Insert your hand in the tray opening and gently pull outany jammed media found (fig. A.11).

Fig. A.11 Remove Media from the Bottom Area of the Printer.

c. Slide the jam handling tray back into position.

6. Replace the toner cartridge in the printer (fig. 2.26).

7. Close the printer’s top cover.

8. Slide the paper cassette back into the printer until it snaps intoplace.

A-12 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

Status Messages

Often, you can solve questions by checking the display window onyour printer’s front panel for printer status or service messages.

Printer Status MessagesThe following messages alert you to the general status of your printeror to situations which you can solve easily without a longtroubleshooting process or a service call.

Accel-a-Writer Power to the printer has been turnedon and the printer is coming up to fullpower before beginning to initialize.

FEED <PAGE SIZE> Manual feed is selected. <PAGE SIZE>is replaced by the size of the selectedmedia, such as letter.

FIRST JOB The printer is checking to see if there isan initializing file (such asSTARTPAGE) which needs to be run.

INITIALIZING The printer is warming up, performingsetup routines, and getting ready to goon line.

NO EP-CART The toner cartridge is either not in theprinter or not seated in place. Install atoner cartridge or reseat the current one.

OFFLINE The printer is off line which means it isnot ready to receive and process data.

PAPER JAM A media jam has occurred along thepaper path. Clear the jam using theprocedure in “Clearing Jams” earlier inthis chapter.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-13

PAPER OUT Either the cassette is pulled out, theselected media source is out of paper, ortrays have different size media loadedwhen tray chaining is selected. Push thecassette in, fill the current mediacassette or tray, or make sure the samesize media is in all cassettes whenchaining.

PRINTER OPEN The printer is not closed completely.Make sure the top and back covers andthe output tray are closed completely.

PROCESSING The printer is processing a job, getting itready to print.

READY/FONT ACCEL The Font Accelerator is updating theRAM disk at runtime with the mostrecently used fonts.

READY/IDLE The printer is on line and ready toaccept a print job.

READY/PRINTING The printer is completing a print job andready to accept a new job to beginprocessing.

RESET 1 The printer has reset to factory defaultsettings and the On Line and Tray Selectkeys can be released safely.

RESET TO STOP The printer has been taken off lineduring an active job.

RESETTING JOB The printer is resetting after the Reset ↑key has been pressed and an active jobhas been cancelled.

TEST PRINT The printer is printing a test page whenthe printer is off line and not workingwithin the menu structure.

A-14 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

TONER LOW The toner is running low. Tryredistributing toner in the currentcartridge or install a new toner cartridge.

WAITING The printer is waiting to receive moredata on a job before printing.

WARMING UP The printer is warming up and the fuserunit has not reached optimum temperatureyet. Wait until READY/IDLE appears inthe window before sending a job to theprinter.

Printer Service MessagesThe following messages indicate mechanical issues requiring aservice call. Make a note of the message before calling.

SERVICE A The fuser unit needs attention.

SERVICE B The laser diode, scanning mirror, orscanning motor needs attention.

SERVICE E An engine part other than one coveredby SERVICE A or B needs attention.

Preliminary Troubleshooting

This section covers both a general once over of the printer andspecific problems that occur with the printer and with the Macintosh,PC, or Ethernet environments. Also, Ethernet troubleshooting iscovered in the Ethernet upgrade documentation.

The General CheckupThe most common causes of printing problems also are the easiest tosolve. Check the following items first.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the printer and thepower source.

• Make sure the power source is working.

• Make sure all cables are connected and seated properly.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-15

Macintosh Environment CheckupFor printing problems not related to the quality of the output, thefollowing checklist may provide a solution.

• Make sure all LocalTalk cabling and transformer boxes areconnected correctly. If there are any open sockets, close themwith terminating resistors. See “Connecting in a MacintoshEnvironment” in chapter 2.

• Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript print driver icon, yourprinter, and the AppleTalk button are selected in the Chooser.

• Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript print driver and yourprinter’s PPD are in your System Folder.

• Make sure you install screen fonts to match the printer fonts youuse.

• If you have an Ethernet setup, make sure all Ethernet cabling isconnected correctly. See your network documentation for details.

• If you have an Ethernet setup and a system version before 7.5 ,open the Control Panel, click Network, and make sure EtherTalkis selected. For System 7.5 and later, select Ethernet from theAppleTalk control panel.

PC Environment CheckupFor printing problems not related to the quality of the output, thefollowing checklist may provide a solution.

• Make sure your application, printer, and host communicationssettings all match. You can check and change printer settingsthrough the front panel (see “The Configuration Menu Structure”in chapter 5). See your application and host documentation forchecking and changing those respective settings.

• Try sending an end-of-job marker using the XANTÉ Utilities D.PSfile. If the previous job lacked this marker, the printer expects moredata and will not print until it receives the end-of-job. See chapter 4,“PC Setup,” for details.

A-16 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

Miscellaneous Troubleshooting

This section covers miscellaneous troubleshooting except for printquality. Print quality troubleshooting is covered in the next section.

§ The printer powers on, but no start-up page prints.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• The start-up page option may not be enabled. Tocheck this, press the Menu → key untilSETUP:MISCELLANEOUS appears in thewindow. Press the Enter ↓ key to enter theMiscellaneous menu. Then, if necessary, press theMenu → key until MISCELLANEOUS:STARTUPPAGE appears in the window and press the Enter ↓key.

If STARTUP PAGE:YES is capitalized, thisfeature is enabled; if so, press the On Line key andskip to the next bullet item in this list. If not, pressthe Enter ↓ key to select this option; then press theOn Line key. Turn the printer off and back on; thestart-up page should print.

• Check the front panel window for messages.

• Make sure the toner cartridge is installed.

• Make sure that the source cassette or tray isselected and it has media loaded. If you use acassette, make sure it is seated firmly in theprinter.

• Remove the paper cassette from the printer. Ifthere is no front panel activity or engine lightactivity, replace the paper cassette, turn the printeroff and try to start it again.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-17

§ The printer powers up, but I cannot print from my application.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Make sure all cables are connected and seatedproperly.

• Make sure the printer is on line. The On Line keyLED should be lit and the window should readREADY/IDLE or READY/PRINTING. If not,press the On Line key once to put the printer on line.

• Make sure the printer is selected in the Chooser(Macintosh) or in the Control Panel (PC ).

• Remove the paper cassette from the printer. Ifthere is no front panel activity or engine lightactivity, replace the paper cassette, turn the printeroff, and start the printer again.

§ All the lights on the printer are staying on.

∞ Possible Solution:

• Be patient. Each time you turn your printer on, aRAM test is performed. For the printers with largeRAM sizes, this test can take a little longer.

§ When I print a legal size document, the text is chopped off fora letter size page.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• If you are printing from the manual feed tray,select manual feed within your application.

• Select legal paper size within your application.

A-18 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

§ When printing a legal size page, the printer jams on the outputtray.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• The printer does not see the paper size as legal.Make sure that the cassette is set for legal size andthat legal size paper is chosen within yourapplication. Then, try printing the file again.

• Select legal paper size and manual feed withinyour application. Then, print from the manual feedtray.

• Make sure the auxiliary output tray is extended.

§ When downloading a font or PostScript file using System 7, theMacintosh displays the message, “Looking for LaserWriter ”and then “Cannot find printer on chooser”.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Verify that the correct Adobe PostScript printerdriver is in the Extensions folder in the Systemsfolder.

• Remove any LaserPrep files from the System andExtensions folders.

• Turn both your Macintosh and printer off and thenback on again.

• Select the Chooser from the Apple menu, makesure AppleTalk is active, and select your printer.

• If you have an Ethernet setup, select ControlPanels from the Apple menu; then select Networkand make sure EtherTalk is selected. Also, makesure the printer and Macintosh are connectedsecurely.

• Continue printing as usual.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-19

§ My printer does not show up on the Chooser.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Check for proper termination on all LocalTalkcables and boxes. See “Connecting in a MacintoshEnvironment” in chapter 2.

• If you have an Ethernet setup, make sure allEthernet cabling is connected correctly. See yournetwork documentation for details.

• Make sure the interface is enabled.

• Disable all background printing and print spoolers.

• Try a new cable between your Macintosh host andprinter.

• Reboot the printer and your host. Try selectingyour printer from the Chooser again.

Print Quality Troubleshooting

This section covers print quality troubleshooting. For other generaltroubleshooting matters, see the previous section “MiscellaneousTroubleshooting.”

§ The solid black print is washed out.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” inchapter 9.

• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute thetoner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7for details.

A-20 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

• Use laser quality media and make sure it meets allthe requirements in the “Selecting Media” inchapter 7.

• Install a new toner cartridge. See “The TonerCartridge” in chapter 2 for details.

§ Scanned images are dark and the details are lost.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Check the original image to see if it is dark. If not,rescan the image and try to print it again.

• Try increasing the printer’s gamma setting whichadjusts midrange grayscale values to bring outdetails. See “Gamma Corrections” in chapter 8 fordetails.

§ Horizontal banding on images occurs when printing.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Use a new toner cartridge, not a refilled tonercartridge.

• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” inchapter 9.

• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute thetoner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7for details.

• Install a new toner cartridge. Remember, a newcartridge may need a short break-in run of severalcopies since toner settles during storage. Chapter 2covers toner installation.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-21

• Replace the media with new media, making sure itmeets all the requirements in “Selecting Media” inchapter 7.

• Adjust the screen frequency for the images withinthe applications. The printer default screenfrequency is 85 lpi. See chapter 8, “AdvancedFeatures,” for screen frequency details.

• Set the printer for a resolution higher than 600 dpiif one is available. See “The Configuration MenuStructure” in chapter 5 for details.

Large dots occur in a vertical line on the page.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Clean the static charge area. See “Cleaning thePrinter” in chapter 9.

§ Vertical white lines occur on the page.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” inchapter 9.

• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute thetoner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7.

• Install a new toner cartridge. Remember, a newcartridge may need a short break-in run of severalcopies since toner settles during storage. See “TheToner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.

• Replace the media with new media, making sure itmeets all the requirements in “Selecting Media” inchapter 7.

A-22 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

§ Marks on the page occur in the same horizontal location butstaggered in the vertical direction.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” inchapter 9.

• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute thetoner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7.

• Install a new toner cartridge. Remember, a newcartridge may need a short break-in run of severalcopies since toner settles during storage. See “TheToner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.

§ The start-up page has banding along the horizontal axis of thepage.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” inchapter 9.

• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute thetoner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7.

• Install a new toner cartridge. See “The TonerCartridge” in chapter 2.

• Replace the media with new media, making sure itmeets all the requirements in “Selecting Media” inchapter 7.

§ Under Windows, character spacing is altered, changingpagination when printing a document at a resolution that isdifferent than the resolution defined when it was created.

∞ Possible Solution:

• Make sure you select a resolution in yourapplication that is available in your printer.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-23

§ When duplexing, toner does not fix properly on the paper.

∞ Possible Solution:

• Pull out the back cover release latch and slide theback unit open as far as it will go; then, locate theduplexer’s mode switch (fig. A.12).

• Set the mode switch to 2 before printing. Then,switch it back to 1 when you finish printing.

Fig. A.12 The Mode Switch

§ When duplexing, toner scatters on the paper.

∞ Possible Solution:

• Pull out the back cover release latch and slide theback unit open as far as it will come; then, locatethe duplexer’s mode switch (fig. A.12).

• Set the mode switch to 2 before printing. Then,switch it back to 1 when you finish printing.

A-24 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

§ When duplexing, the paper wrinkles and corners fold over.

∞ Possible Solutions:

• Make sure media meets the guidelines in “MediaSpecifications” in chapter 7.

• Pull out the paper and turn it around so theopposite side loads first. Then, reload it and try toprint again.

• If using recycled paper, check for wrinkling orfolding. We suggest that you do not use recycledpaper because it absorbs moisture easily, whichmakes it more pliant. (See “Media Specifications”in chapter 7 for details.)

• If paper has been moved from anotherenvironment, it may require time to adjust to thenew conditions. This may take up to two hours,especially if the paper moves from a humid to adry location.

Calling for Technical SupportEven with XANTÉ’s dedication to building quality, reliableproducts, there may be occasions when you need additional help.XANTÉ’s experienced Technical Support personnel can help youresolve configuration and printing issues by phone, fax, bulletinboard, and the internet.

Most printer problems can be solved by following the suggestions inthis chapter. If these solutions do not work, gather the followingtroubleshooting information, and then call XANTÉ’s TechnicalSupport.

______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-25

Troubleshooting Information• A start-up page from the printer

• The model of your printer

• The printer ROM version (Newer printers: press the OnLine key for 5 seconds; the version appears in the window.Older printers: the version is on each ROM chip on thecontroller board.)

• The type of host and the operating system (versionnumber) you are using

• The current interface in use (and communication settings ifusing the serial interface)

• The amount of printer memory (this appears on thestart-up page)

• The application(s), including the version(s) used

• A full description of the problem

• A list of error or status messages if they appear

If you have the troubleshooting information available when you call,it helps our technicians serve you more quickly.

XANTÉ Phone Support

Before you call for support, be sure to gather the information listedin the previous section. Contact XANTÉ’s Technical Support at 800-926-8393 in the US and Canada and at 334-342-4846 elsewherefrom 7 a.m. until 7 p.m. Central time Monday through Thursday and7 a.m. until 6 p.m. Central time on Friday.

A-26 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

XANTÉ Fax Support

If you prefer, fax questions to XANTÉ’s Technical Support at334-342-4635. Include your name, your company name and theinformation listed under “Troubleshooting Information” earlier inthis section. Also, indicate whether you wish the response to befaxed, phoned, or e-mailed and include your appropriate number.

XANTÉ Bulletin Board Support

XANTÉ provides a 24 hour technical service bulletin board. Theboard number is 334-342-4746. The setup is 8 data bits, no parity,and one stop bit with baud rates up to 14,400.Before you use the bulletin board, be sure to gather and include theinformation listed under “Troubleshooting Information” earlier inthis section. New users can log on as new.

The XANTÉ bulletin board contains the latest utility files andtechnical bulletins. You can also use the bulletin board to uploadproblem files for us to test.

XANTÉ Internet Support

XANTÉ’s web page at www.xante.com contains a Product Supportsection where you can download printer drivers, software, PPDs,manuals, and other technical information. The FAQ section answersthe most frequently asked questions about each product. The webincludes a list of important phone numbers and e-mail addresses.

If, after reading the web page, you still have questions, you can sendan e-mail to techsupport@xante.com. Be sure to include theinformation listed under “Troubleshooting Information” in youre-mail.

◊ ◊ ◊

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-1

Appendix B

Application Notes and Page Design

Appendix OverviewIntroduction .................................................................................... B-3Application Notes .......................................................................... B-3FreeHand ........................................................................................ B-4

FreeHand (PC) ......................................................................... B-4FreeHand (Macintosh) ............................................................. B-4

QuarkXPress .................................................................................. B-5QuarkXPress (PC) ................................................................... B-5QuarkXPress (Macintosh) ....................................................... B-6

PageMaker ..................................................................................... B-8PageMaker Setup (PC) ............................................................ B-8PageMaker Setup (Macintosh) ................................................ B-8Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5 ................................................ B-11

CorelDRAW ................................................................................. B-12AutoCAD 12 for PostScript ......................................................... B-12

Configuring AutoCAD 12 ..................................................... B-12Printing from AutoCAD 12 ................................................... B-14

Adobe Separator 5.0 (Macintosh) ................................................ B-15MultiAd Creator ........................................................................... B-16Page Design.................................................................................. B-16

Typefaces and Fonts .............................................................. B-16Other Elements of Design ............................................................ B-19

Orientation ............................................................................. B-19Pitch ....................................................................................... B-20Point Size and x-Height ......................................................... B-20Spacing .................................................................................. B-22Page Design Tips ................................................................... B-22

B-2 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

Notes

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-3

IntroductionThe first half of this appendix provides some helpful information andhints on working with some of today’s most popular applications inMacintosh and PC environments. The second half deals with generalpage design theory and hints.

Application NotesYou should be familiar with all standard procedures for yourworking environment. This includes how to click, drag, copy, choosecommands, select options, use buttons and boxes, locate files, andscroll windows.

The method of performing specific printing tasks may varydepending upon your application, your operating system, and versionof printer driver used. See chapter 6 for details about using thecurrent Adobe PostScript printer driver. Check the applicationdocumentation to determine where to find and how to use theseoptions.

Some older applications do not offer all of the printer’s features oroptions. For example, some older PageMaker versions do notinclude a resolution option; you must select the resolution throughthe printer’s front panel. If options are available in several places,application selections override the printer’s front panel setting. Ifthere is a question or if the job does not print as expected, select thedesired setting both through the application and through the frontpanel.

B-4 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

FreeHandThe XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes special printer descriptionfiles to use with older Aldus Macintosh versions of FreeHand. Youneed to install the file required by your version of FreeHand andyour system environment. Older PC versions and newer Macintoshand PC versions do not require extra files.

FreeHand (PC)

In a PC environment, FreeHand works with the XANTÉ UtilitiesWindows printer description file; see chapter 4, “PC Setup,” fordetails about installing this file.

FreeHand (Macintosh)

In a Macintosh environment, FreeHand uses files known as PPD files(PostScript Printer Description files). See chapter 3, “MacintoshSetup,” for details about installing this file.

When you print, use your printer’s PPDs to obtain the best qualityfrom your XANTÉ printer. This section covers changing to therequired PPD for FreeHand versions 3.1 and 4.0. If you have anotherversion, check the application documentation for details on selectingthe PPD.

FreeHand 3.1: To change to the required PPD

1. Choose Print from the File Menu.

2. Click Change in the Print Dialog Box. The Print Optionswindow appears.

3. Select your printer’s PPD in the Printer Type box in the Printdialog box.

4. Select other desired options and then print from FreeHand asyou normally would.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-5

FreeHand 4.0: To change to the required PPD

1. Choose Print from the File Menu.

2. Click Print in the lower left corner (not the upper right) of thePrint Dialog Box. The Print Options window appears.

3. Click Select PPD. A list of printers appears.

4. Select your printer from the list. The pop-up menu closes.

5. Select other desired options and then print from FreeHand asyou normally would.

QuarkXPressThe XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes special printer descriptionfiles to use with QuarkXPress. Install the file required for theprogram’s version and your system environment.

Note: Load the XANTÉ PDF following the instructions in chapter3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC). However, if you haveprinting problems, you may want to try changing the PDFselection to Generic B&W and set Page Size only at the topof the QuarkXPress Page Setup dialog box. Also, if you usea custom page size, it is best to use the Generic B&Woption.

QuarkXPress (PC)

QuarkXPress versions between 3.3 and 4.0 require a PDF (printerdescription file) in addition to the PPD file. XANTÉ Utilities disksinclude QuarkXPress PDF files for both the standard and wideformat printer options in the PDFs folder. We recommend that youuse these PDFs to obtain the best quality from your XANTÉ printer.See “PDFs Folder” in chapter 4 for details about installing this file.

Note: QuarkXPress 4.0 does not need a PDF.

B-6 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

QuarkXPress Page Setup (PC)

1. Create your document.

2. Select Printer Setup from the File menu. The Printer Setupwindow appears.

3. Select the Use PDF For: option and hold down the shift key. Alist of printers appears.

4. Select either your printer’s name that is not italicized orGeneric B&W. Then click OK.

5. Select Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears.

6. Set other options as desired. Then, click OK to print.

QuarkXPress (Macintosh)

QuarkXPress versions between 3.3 and 4.0 require a PDF (printerdescription file) in addition to the PPD file. XANTÉ Utilitiesincludes PDF files for both the standard and wide format printeroptions in the QuarkXPress PDF folder in the Drivers folder. Werecommend that you use these PDFs to obtain the best quality fromyour XANTÉ printer. See “App Drivers Folder” in chapter 3 fordetails about installing this file.

Note: QuarkXPress 4.0 does not need a PDF.

QuarkXPress Page Setup

1. Create your document.

2. Select Page Setup from the File menu. The Page Setup dialogbox appears.

3. Make the following selections:

Paper: select the media’s page size

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-7

Printer Type: hold down the shift key and select the Non-italicized name of your printer.

Paper Size: select the same size as you did for Paper ifyou chose the name of your printer underPrinter Type. The top may be the size nameand the bottom the measurement; forexample, Paper = Tabloid and Paper Size =11 x 17. If you chose Generic B&W, there isno Paper Size option.

Note: Resolution cannot be changed in the page setup box; ithas no effect on the printer. Printer resolution must beset in the Print Options dialog box.

4. Click OK. Then select Print from the File menu. The Printdialog box appears.

5. Click Options. Then, make the following selections.

PostScript Errors: Select Print Detailed Report

Resolution: Select the desired resolution supported byyour printer

Note: Set other options, such as Enhanced Screen, Gamma,and Tray Switch as desired.

6. Click OK. Then, click Print.

Screen Frequency and Angle in QuarkXPressYou can adjust the screen frequency and the screen angle in the PageSetup dialog box. We recommend you set the screen angle at 45˚ andthe screen frequency range between 60 lpi and 106 lpi. The printer’sdefault is 85 lpi.

Also, resolution plays a role in selecting lpi. A high lpi, such as 105,will produce better output at a higher resolution such as 1200 x 1200dpi. For more information on lpi selection, see chapter 8, “AdvancedFeatures.”

B-8 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

When printing tiff images, select the image, then go to Style andselect “Other Screen.” Then, you can select your own specificationsfor screen setting, angle setting, and dot pattern.

Once you select settings, save the document to retain the settingswhen the document is reopened.

PageMakerThe XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes Aldus PPDs to use witholder Aldus versions of PageMaker. Install the file required for theprogram’s version and your system environment.

PageMaker Setup (PC)

For PageMaker versions earlier than 5.0, copy the Aldus PPD intothe Aldus PPD4 folder. When you print from PageMaker, select thePPD in the Print window under Printer Type.

For PageMaker 5.0 place the XANTÉ PPD into the Aldus PPD4folder.

For PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5, copy the printer’s PPD into the PPD4folder (PM6 or 6.5: Rsrc: Usenglsh: PPD4). When you print fromPageMaker, select the PPD in the Print window under Printer Type.

Note: Remember to update PPDs in the Aldus Additions Function.See your PageMaker documentation for details.

PageMaker Setup (Macintosh)

PageMaker versions earlier than 5.0 require the Aldus PPD(PostScript Printer Description) file in addition to the standard PPDfile supplied for your printer. XANTÉ Utilities disks include thesePPD files for both the standard and wide format printer options in theAldus PPD folder in the Drivers folder on the Macintosh Utilitiesdisk.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-9

Load and configure the Adobe printer driver and your printer’s PPDfollowing instructions in chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup.” Then, installthe XANTÉ PPD for Aldus PageMaker by copying the appropriatePPD file from the utilities disk to the Aldus PPD folder in the SystemFolder.

The PPDs are named according to the printer. A W after the nameindicates the PPD is for use on printers with the wide format option.

Selecting the PPD in PageMaker 4.2 and later.After you install the PPD file for your version of PageMaker, selectthe PPD using the procedure below for your versions of PageMaker.This section covers versions 4.2, 5.0, and 6.0. If you have anotherversion, check the application documentation for details on selectingthe PPD.

Note: PageMaker 4.0 uses APD files, rather than the Aldus PPDssupplied on the utilities disks. This version is limited in thenew printer features that it can use. Different APDs areavailable for specific printer resolutions. This version ofPageMaker will not allow a 25.00" (635 mm) format.Instead, the B25 oversized page is formatted for a 22.00"(559 mm) page, and the image is positioned at the bottom ofthe 25.00" (635 mm) page. If you are using PageMaker 4.0,contact XANTÉ Technical Support for a copy of the APDfile for your printer (see appendix A for XANTÉ TechnicalSupport information).

PageMaker 4.2: After you install the PPD file for your version ofPageMaker, use the following procedure to select the desired PPDfile.

1. Open your PageMaker document.

2. Choose Print from the File menu. The print dialog box appearswith a Printer option in the bottom half of the window.

B-10 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

3. Select the Printer option box and hold the mouse button down.A pop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.

4. Choose your printer’s PPD. The pop-up menu disappears andthe selected file appears in the Printer box.

5. Make any other selections you want in the Print dialog box.

6. Click Print to send the job to the printer.

PageMaker 5.0: After you install the PPD file for your PageMakerversion, use the following procedure to select the desired PPD file.

1. Open your PageMaker document.

2. Choose Print from the File menu. The print dialog box appearswith a Type option in the top half of the window.

3. Select the Type option box and hold the mouse button down. Apop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.

4. Choose your printer’s PPD. The pop-up menu disappears andthe selected file appears in the Type box.

5. Make any other selections you want in the Print dialog box.

6. Click Print to send the job to the printer.

PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5: To select the PPD file

1. Open your PageMaker document.

2. Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appearswith a PPD option in the top half of the window.

3. Select the PPD option box and hold the mouse button down. Apop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.

4. Choose your printer’s PPD. The pop-up menu disappears andthe selected file appears in the PPD box.

5. Click Features. The Printer Features window appears.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-11

6. Make sure the Installed Memory, Spooler Enabled, OptionalDuplexer, Optional Wide Format, Optional Lower Tray, andTraySwitch settings match your setup. (See the next section,“Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5,” for details.) Then, clickDocument to return to the Print dialog box.

7. Make any other desired selections in the Print dialog box.

8. Click Print to send the job to the printer.

Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5

From the print dialog box, select the Features menu. Printer optionsthat are set through the Options menu in most applications are setthrough the Features menu in PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5. See chapter 6,“PPD Settings,” for a description of the printer features availablethrough this menu.

In addition to the standard printer options described in chapter 6,PageMaker requires that the following options be set in the Featuresmenu of the print dialog box.

• Installed Memory must be set to agree with your printer andChooser configuration. Your printer’s installed resolutionupgrade will not appear in the Resolution menu of thePagemaker Features dialog box unless the Installed Memoryoption is properly configured.

• Spooler Enabled must be set to True to enable the SaveSpooled Job menu in the Features section of the PageMakerPrint dialog box. The spooler must also be enabled for theinterface you are using (through the front panel or XANTÉCommand Center) and configured in the Chooser or Windowsconfiguration.

• Optional Duplexer must be set to agree with your printer andChooser or Windows configuration.

• Optional Wide Format must be set to agree with your printerand Chooser or Windows configuration.

B-12 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

• Optional Lower Tray must be set to agree with your printerand Chooser or Windows configuration to allow you to selectthe lower tray as the media source. This option does not haveto be selected to use the PageMaker TraySwitch option.

• TraySwitch allows you to select the printer’s tray chainingfeature on a per job basis. Printer’s Default used the settingconfigured on the printer’s front panel. True and False enableor disable the tray chaining feature for the current job,regardless of the front panel setting.

Check the Options menu in the print dialog box. Make sure thatInclude PostScript Error Handler is marked. This handler featurecauses an error page to print if a PostScript error occurs; in turn, thispage helps identify the problem.

Check the Paper menu of the print dialog box. Select the appropriatepaper size and paper source for the job. The paper size must matchthe size of the paper installed for the job to print correctly.

CorelDRAWWhen you print from CorelDRAW, you must change the printer’soption for Enhanced Screen to None and Gamma to 0 or else theoutput line screen (lpi) will not change.

AutoCAD 12 for PostScriptAutoCAD is an engineering design package. This section covers howto configure AutoCAD to print to your printer and once that is done,how to print from AutoCAD.

Configuring AutoCAD 12

After you install AutoCAD release 12, configure the program to printto your printer using the following procedure.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-13

1. Select Configure from the File menu. A Configure menuappears.

2. Select Configure plotter. The Plotter Configuration menuappears.

3. Select Add a plotter configuration. The Available Plottersscreen appears.

4. Select Postscript Device ADI 4.2 - by AutoDesk, Inc.

5. Under Supported Models, select 300 dpi. The question “Doyou want color?” appears.

Note: Even though 300 dpi is selected in the application, thedocument prints at the resolution set on the printer.

6. Select Yes to answer the question. Then, the question, “Do youwish to append a ^Z?” appears.

7. Select NO. The question “Is your PostScript device connectedto a <S>erial or <P>arallel port?” appears.

8. Select the port the printer is connected to, serial or parallel.

9. Enter the address of the port you selected or press the Enterkey if there is no change.

10. Check over your device location, and if you are satisfied, pressthe Enter key for no changes. The question “Do you want tochange anything?” appears.

11. Check over the list for all the selections. If you want to makechanges, type YES and press the Enter key; then make thedesired changes. If not, type NO, press the Enter key. Themessage “Enter a description for the plotter:” appears.

12. Enter the name you would like for the printer to have (such asPMII).

13. Select Exit to the Configure menu.

AutoCAD is now configured to print from your printer.

B-14 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

Printing from AutoCAD 12

After you configure AutoCAD to print from your printer, use thefollowing procedure to print from AutoCAD.

1. Open your AutoCAD program.

2. Select Plot from the File menu. The Plot Configurationwindow appears (fig. B.1).

Preview...

DisplayExtentsLimitsViewWindows

Plot ConfigurationDevice and Default Information

PlateMaker

Scale To Fit

OK Cancel Help

Paper Size and Orientation

Device and Default Selection...

Pen Parameters

Pen Assignment... Optimization...

Additional Parameters

Views... Window... File Name...

Hide Lines

Adjust Area Fill

Plot To File

Inches

MM

Plot Area 16.50 By 10.50

Size... User

Scale, Rotation and Origin

Plotted Inches = Drawing Units

Rotation and Origin...

10.5 9

Plot Preview

Partial Full

Fig. B.1 The Plot Configuration Window

3. Click Device and Default Selection. A pop-up menu appearswith a list of available printers. Choose the printer youconfigured with the ADI - 4.2 driver. The pop-up menudisappears and the selected printer appears in the PlotConfiguration window.

4. Click Size in the Paper Size and Orientation box. A windowappears where you can enter or select the height and width ofthe paper you are using.

5. Enter or select the width and height of the paper which you aregoing to use respectively in the Width and Height fields. Then,click OK and the Plot Configuration window appears again.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-15

6. Make sure Scale to Fit is selected in the Scale, Rotation, andOrigin box.

7. Select OK.

Now you are ready to plot your document. Refer to your AutoCADmanual for further details.

AutoCAD Tip: To make your printer the default printer so that youdo not need to select it each time you open a document, use thefollowing procedure.

1. Open an AutoCAD document.

2. Select Print from the File menu.

3. Click and hold on the Printer box. A window appears listingprinter drivers.

4. Click Cancel.

5. Save the document.

The next time the document is opened, your printer will be the defaultprinter. Use this same process with any other documents that werecreated and saved with a different printer selected as the output device.

Adobe Separator 5.0 (Macintosh)Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Separator come bundled together. TheAdobe Illustrator 5.0 application does not operate with a PostScriptprinter description (PPD) file. However, Adobe Separator 5.0requires a PPD file on the 4.0 Adobe Specifications.

The PPD files are on the Macintosh XANTÉ Utilities that comesalong with the printer. Choose the PPDs without the PM50extensions and copy them into any folder on the Macintosh. In yourapplication, you will get the option “Open PPD.” If you click on thisoption, you can tell Adobe Separator where the chosen PPD file islocated on the Macintosh.

B-16 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

MultiAd CreatorYour printer’s PPD should be placed in the PPD folder in theMultiAd Creator folder.

Page DesignAdvanced imaging includes not only the mechanical side of printing,but also the elements of page design. Your printer with true AdobePostScript 3 takes care of most of the mechanical side, allowing yousuch freedom as scaling, rotating, and filling text and graphics.However, a basic understanding of terms and elements of pagedesign can help you add finishing touches for a truly professionalimage.

The rest of this chapter deals with some of the language andelements used in desktop publishing page design.

Typefaces and Fonts

Two very important terms to understand are typefaces and fonts.These terms often are used interchangeably which can lead toconfusion sometimes. A font is actually a subdivision of a typeface.

Typeface refers to the style of printing type, not the size. The styleincludes design elements such as spacing, stroke, and weight whichare covered later in this chapter.

A font is one size of a typeface and includes all the availablecharacters of that typeface.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-17

Serif, Sans Serif, and Miscellaneous TypefacesTypefaces fall into three categories of styles, serif, sans serif, andmiscellaneous. A serif is an extra flourish or decoration added to theend of a main line forming a letter, character, or symbol.

PostScript PostScriptSerif (Times Roman) Sans Serif (Helvetica)

ΠοστΣχριπτMiscellaneous (Symbol)

Fig. B.2 Serif and Sans Serif Typefaces

Serif typefaces include extra flourishes such as the small circle atthe top of the a or the small tails hanging down each end of the crossbar in the T in Times Roman (fig. B.2).

Sans Serif typefaces lack the decorations. Sans means without, andthese typefaces have very clean, plain lines such as those found inthe Helvetica typeface (fig. B.2).

Miscellaneous typefaces include those which have combinations ofserif and sans serif designs as well as graphic type characters such asarrows, hearts, squares, or Greek symbols.

Each typeface category lends itself to particular areas of page design.For example, the small detailed lines on a serif typeface help draw areader’s eye across a line of text. This makes it well suited for bodytext such as the Times Roman font used in this manual.

B-18 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

The clean, sharp lines of a sans serif typeface make it excellent forshort headlines or signs. The lack of detail, makes it easier for theeye to group several words into a short phrase, grasping the meaningat a glance. However, it lacks the drawing effect of details whichmake long text blocks easier to read.

Miscellaneous typefaces are handy to draw attention to a particularsection of the page or indicate breaks in topics or sections. Forexample, three diamonds ( ◊ ◊ ◊ ) signal the ends of major chaptersin this manual.

Italic, Oblique, Bold, Demi, Medium and Light FormsTypefaces can be broken down into various forms to help distinguishthem. These forms include italic, oblique, bold, demi, medium, light,and narrow.

Italic and oblique forms are the printed versions of hand written(cursive) copy. Although the letters do not touch, their slant gives theimpression of being written in long hand. Italic forms are designedindividually, while oblique are mechanically slanted forms of theoriginal typeface.

Times Italic Helvetica Oblique

Fig. B.3 Italic and Oblique Typefaces

Bold, demi, medium, and light forms are created by varying thestroke weight (density) of character lines.

Times BoldITC AvantGarde Demi

ITC Zapf Chancery-Medium-ItalicITC Bookman Light

Fig. B.4 Bold, Demi, Medium, and Light Typefaces

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-19

The forms can be used separately or in combination to add to theimpact of the printed copy. For example, the following note has abold italic introduction to draw attention, but the body text switchesback to a medium weight (sometimes referred to as roman) formatfor easy readability.

Note: Although forms may be combined such as a bold italicversion, if you change forms too often within a document,the forms tend to lose the power to draw attention and endup with a cluttered appearance.

Other Elements of DesignOther elements of design include orientation, pitch, point size, x-Height, and spacing.

Orientation

The terms portrait and landscape orientations come from the artworld and indicate the direction of a picture or copy on the page.Usually portraits are narrow in width and long in length whilelandscapes are wider across and shorter in length. The same is truewhen you print from your printer. Copy across the narrow directionof the page is in portrait orientation which is used for most businessletters. Landscape orientation goes across the wide dimension of thepage and is used often for spreadsheets and graphs.

Portrait Landscape

Fig. B.5 Page Orientations

B-20 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

Pitch

Pitch, sometimes referred to as cpi or characters per inch, indicatesthe number of characters which can fit horizontally within one inch.For example, your printer has the PCL typeface Courier 10 pitch, 12points. Ten characters fit within an inch and the size is 12 points inheight.

1 2 3

This is 10 characters/inch pitch

This is 12 characters/inch pitch

This is 15 characters/inch pitch

Fig. B.6 Pitch Samples

Point Size and x-Height

Point size comes from an old typesetting term for a typeface’sheight. This is measured from the top of highest ascender (theupward stroke on a character) to the lowest descender (the downwardstoke) within a character set (fig. B.7).

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-21

6 Point

8 Point10 Point12 Point14 Point18 Point24 Point

54 Point

Ready72 Point

PostScriptAscender

x-Height

Descender

Fig. B.7 Point Size and x-Height

The height of a lowercase letter without an ascender or descender isreferred to as the x-Height. This measurement varies from typefaceto typeface and can cause an optical illusion where the same sizetypefaces appear to be different sizes.

B-22 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

Spacing

Character spacing has two forms, monospacing and proportionalspacing (fig. B.8). Monospaced characters have equal spacingbetween each letter which is sometimes referred to as fixed spacing.An excellent example is the resident Courier typeface. Monospacinghas a mechanical, block look and works extremely well forspreadsheets where multiple columns of numbers need to be aligned.

Proportional spacing varies the width between characters. Forexample the letter l needs less space than a w. Except for Courier, therest of your printer’s resident PostScript typefaces are proportionallyspaced. Proportional spacing is more legible, better for mostdocuments not requiring multiple aligned columns.

123456789 123456789PostScript PostScript

Monospacing Proportional spacingCourier Times Roman

Fig. B.8 Character Spacings

Page Design Tips

Often little design details make the difference between an adequateor professional job. The following tips may help you produce thebest possible output from your printer.

• Keep your page design simple. Too many typeface and designelement changes can produce a cluttered, confusing page.

• Always consider your audience. For example, readers with visualproblems or those just learning to read will respond better tolarger point sizes. A conservative reader may prefer a traditionaltypeface such as Times Roman.

______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-23

• Usually, serif typefaces are more legible for large bodies of text,while sans serifs work better for headlines.

• Keep text column widths under 4" to reduce the chance of areader losing his place when his eyes move from the end of oneline to the beginning of the next.

• All capitalized text is much harder to read than mixed case text.

• Vary paragraph lengths to help readers keep track of where theyare on the page.

• Keep most paragraphs to five lines or less to help prevent longtext blocks from tiring or intimidating readers. Mixing linelengths within a paragraph also helps.

• Match your typeface to the subject. For example, Zapf Chancery isperfect for formal invitations, while Helvetica Bold worksbetter for EXIT signs.

• Use white space (wider margins, more space between sectionheadings and paragraphs, etc.) to decrease a cluttered, heavy textlook.

These are suggestions which work well in most cases. Your printerand Adobe PostScript make it easy for you to test these tips andselect the ones that work best for your particular job.

◊ ◊ ◊

B-24 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

___________________________________________ Glossary G-1

Glossary

G-2 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Notes

___________________________________________ Glossary G-3

Glossary

∆E(Pronounced Delta-E), a calculation of the relative position of twocolors in a color space, which indicates how similar the colors are toone another. A ∆E of 1 is perceptible by the human eye. A ∆E of 6 to7 is usually considered acceptable in the printing industry.

10Base2An IEEE Ethernet cabling standard using thin coaxial cable. Theprefix of the name, 10, defines the transmission speed of the cable as10 Megabits per second; Base indicates that the signal is a basebandtransmission; and 2 describes the approximate maximum length of anetwork segment, in hundreds of meters (maximum segment lengthin the specification is 189 meters). See also Thinnet.

10BaseTAn IEEE Ethernet cabling standard using UTP (unshielded twistedpair) cable. The naming convention follows that for 10Base2, exceptthat the T indicates the cable type (twisted pair), rather thanmaximum segment length. See also Unshielded Twisted Pair.

Additive Color TheoryA color theory based on the addition of specific quantities of threeprimary colored lights to create all other colors. The most commonprimary colored lights used to create additive colors are red, green,and blue (RGB). Computer monitors and scanners use the RGBcolor model to create all other colors.

AppleTalk Network Multiple computers and/or peripheral devices which are connectedand adhere to the AppleTalk communication protocol.

Application SoftwareAny software program, such as a desktop publishing program, wordprocessing program, graphics program, or any program that isinstalled in your computer system.

G-4 Glossarybb __________________________________________

BandingThree meanings in the context of this manual: 1) visible changes ofshading in a gradient print; 2) lines that appear in a printed imagedue to ink drying between print passes; 3) the method of processingimage data in sections.

Baud RateThe number of bits per second sent or received by a device over aserial interface.

Bitmapped ImageAn image created by the placement of individual dots or pixels on agrid. In contrast, vector images are created by specifying the locationof points and the description of the lines between these points.

BleedAn image printed beyond the page margin, so that when trimmed tosize, the image extends to the edge of the sheet. A full bleed is animage which extends to all four edges of the sheet. Most XANTÉprinters can print up to an 11.00" x 17.00" (279 mm x 432 mm) fullbleed image on oversized (11.81" x 19.00" [300 mm x 483 mm], orlarger) media. See your manual for information about the media sizethat can be used with your printer.

BufferA temporary data storage area. For example, a printer buffer holdsincoming data waiting to be processed for printing.

CalibrationThe measurement and adjustment of hardware output against astandard value set to ensure that output is predictable.

Cascade PrintingPrinting multiple copies of the same job on more than one printersimultaneously.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-5

Catch upGlobs of ink that appear on final press output. This may be solvedby increasing the amount of water used on the run and then adjustingthe ink/water balance, by increasing the fountain solution, or byadding wetting agent.

Centronics InterfaceAn interface standard for parallel data transmission which sends onebyte (8 bits) of data at a time between computers and localperipheral devices. Parallel interfacing is generally faster than serialinterfacing.

Character SetThe complete set of characters that appear in a typeface family. Seealso Typeface and Family.

CMYK ColorA color system based on the mixture of cyan, magenta, yellow, andblack. These ink colors are used to create printer’s process colors.See Subtractive Color Theory.

Coaxial CableAn electrical cable made up of an insulated dielectric tube with asolid wire core. The name is derived from the fact that theconducting wire and dielectric tube share the same center point oraxis. Coaxial cable is used for cable television connections andmany Ethernet networks.

Color Gamut The range of colors that can be produced by an output device, suchas a color monitor or printer, or recognized by an input device suchas a scanner or the human eye.

Color Management System (CMS)Software which translates color information between devices (suchas a printer and a monitor) or between a device and the InternationalColor Consortium (ICC) format that other system devices canunderstand.

G-6 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Color ProfileA file that describes the color characteristics of a device, ascompared to a standard. A color management system uses colorprofiles to convert color information from one device to another.

Color Rendering Dictionary (CRD)A look up table used to transform device independent colorinformation, such as CIE based colors, to the CMYK color spaceused by printers.

Color SeparationThe separation of a color image into the primary (subtractive) colorsfor printing. A four color separation produces separate cyan,magenta, yellow, and black files.

Color SpaceA three dimensional representation of colors, such as RGB or CMY.A color device interprets and reproduces color within a specific colorspace.

ColorimeterA device to measure reflected or transmitted light. It then calculatesthe measurements compared to a common standard based on thehuman eye’s normal interpretation of red, blue, and green stimulusunder a given light source.

ControllerIn the context of the CT4 manual, an intelligent device, such as theAccel-a-Graphix CT4, that can convert application data into printerdata and control attached printers.

Control ProtocolA method of controlling the flow of data between computer devices,either hardware (DTR/DSR) or software (XON/XOFF). Also calledhandshaking or transmission protocol.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-7

Default SettingsThe values or settings that are used by your printer or controller, ifno other direction is received from an application. Printer defaultsettings can be changed by the user using the front panel. Somesettings can be changed through XANTÉ Command Center. See alsoFactory Default Settings.

DensitometerA device that produces a set light source and measures thetransmission of light through or reflection of light from a surfacecompared to a common density standard.

DensityA measurement of the transmission of light through or reflection oflight from a surface. For example, the thicker (denser) the ink, theless light it reflects.

Dot GainThe result of media absorbing ink which causes the ink to spread outrather than forming a crisp, precise pattern. This gives theappearance of a “gain” in value of the tint. For example, an 80%magenta tint may appear to be 83% because of dot gain. See alsoTint.

Downloaded FontA font that has been transferred to the memory or hard disk of aprinter or controller.

DPIDots Per Inch. The number of dots that can be produced vertically orhorizontally in an inch. In the context of this manual, it is ameasurement of the resolution of a printer. See also Resolution.

DriftThe small changes in the measurement capabilities of an instrument.For example, over time a monitor can drift in its ability to produce a100% red because of age, environment, usage, and other factors.Calibration brings the instrument back in line with standard colormeasurements.

G-8 Glossarybb __________________________________________

DTR/DSRData Terminal Ready/Data Set Ready. A hardware implementedprotocol which controls the flow of data in serial communication.See also XON/XOFF.

Enhanced Screen TechnologyXANTÉ technology that optimizes the line screen for an image. Theline screen is based on the printer’s resolution and the number ofgray levels selected.

Error DiffusionAn algorithm that defines the placement of dots on an image basedon data from surrounding cells.

EthernetSpecification for the physical and data link layers of the OSIReference Model. Originally developed by Xerox and jointlypromoted by DEC, Intel, and Xerox (DIX) for local area networks,Ethernet was adopted by IEEE as the basis for the 802 networkingstandards.

EtherTalkThe AppleTalk protocols transmitted over Ethernet media.

Factory Default SettingsSettings programmed into the printer or controller at the factory,such as English as the default display window language. The defaultsettings for the printer can be changed using the front panel and, insome cases, XANTÉ Command Center. See “Configuration” in yourprinter or controller manual for instructions to reset to the factorydefault settings. See also Default Settings.

FamilyThe group name of the typeface, which identifies the typeface’sdistinctive shape. Typeface families are often named after theirdesigners (John Baskerville, Frederick Goudy); they can suggest howa typeface may be used (Bookman, Century Schoolbook); or theymay describe the typeface’s appearance (Clearface, BrushScript).See also Typeface.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-9

FIFOFirst In First Out. FIFO chips are used as hardware buffers toserialize transmission of data to the print engine.

File ServerA computer specifically intended for storing files that people canshare over the network.

FilmStarXANTÉ’s desktop system that processes high quality positive ornegative film without the time and expense of camera and darkroomprocedures.

Flow ControlThe mechanism used in serial communications to signal when adevice is ready to accept data. This prevents one device from sendingdata faster than the receiving device can use or store it. The printersupports both XON/XOFF (software) and DTR/DSR (hardware)flow control. The host computer and printer must be set to use thesame flow control protocol.

FontIn the desktop publishing industry, font is often used interchangeablywith the term “typeface.” However, a font is a typeface subset in aparticular point size and style. See also Typeface.

Font AcceleratorXANTÉ technology which sets aside a percentage of available RAMdisk to store fonts. When enabled, the Font Accelerator automaticallyloads the most recently used fonts into RAM disk for faster access bythe printer. See also RAM disk.

Gamma CurveA graphical representation of the relationship between the inputvalues and the output values of a device, such as a monitor or printer.If the device reproduces (outputs) the exact values requested (input),the graph is a straight line.

G-10 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Gamma CorrectionThe process of changing the gamma curve of a device by adjustingmidrange grayscale values without altering black shadow and whitehighlight values at each end of a gray scale. In addition to the sevengamma curves supplied on your printer, XANTÉ utilities allow youto create custom curves for specific conditions.

GamutSee Color Gamut.

Gamut MappingThe process of converting the color gamut of one device, such as amonitor, to that of another device, such as a printer.

GatewayAn electronic device that connects two networks, each of whichoperates with a different set of protocols, such as AppleTalk andEtherTalk.

GhostingA faint repetition of a pattern produced during imaging.

GraphicInformation presented in the form of pictures or images.

GrayscaleA media test strip starting with a 100% black swatch and progressingthrough lighter gray tints usually in 5% or 10% increments to 0%black (white).

HalftoneA method of producing the appearance of smooth gradations of colorby printing dots of various sizes at constant intervals on a grid. Inprinting, the dots are actually halftone cells, which are, themselves agrid of printer dots. The size of the halftone is varied by printing ornot printing dots within the halftone cell.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-11

HandshakingAn initial communication between two computers, which determineswhether they are connected and compatibly configured to allow twoway data transmission. See also Flow Control .

Hard DiskA storage medium made up of a magnetic disk or disks (platters)sealed into a drive or cartridge. Most XANTÉ printers can supportan internal drive and multiple external SCSI drives. The Accel-a-Graphix CT4 can support multiple internal SCSI drives.

HoldoutMedia’s ability to hold ink on the surface, rather than to absorb it.Ink held on the surface dries in a more precise, crisp pattern thanabsorbed ink which spreads out causing dot gain. See also Dot Gain.

IDEIntegrated Drive Electronics. A standard used to integrate a hard diskwith a controller board. XANTÉ printers can be configured withinternal IDE hard disks.

IEEEInstitute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers. An organizationactive in the creation of electrical, communication, and networkingstandards in the United States.

Imageable AreaIn the context of this manual, the area on a page that the printer canaccess for printing. For example, on the PlateMaker II, with the extrawide printing option, a 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) pagehas an imageable area of 11.97" x 24.93" (304 mm x 633 mm).

Interface CableA cable that physically connects two computer devices so that theycan communicate.

G-12 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Landscape OrientationA page format that is larger horizontally than it is vertically. Theterm comes from painting when artists paint “landscapes” across thewide dimension of the canvas. See also Portrait Orientation.

Levels of GrayThe number of shades (tonal changes) of gray in a halftone image.The number depends on the line screen and printing resolution used.The higher the number, the smoother the image looks during thetransition of dot sizes. See also Gray Scale and Line Screen.

Line ScreenThe screen frequency, or the number of rows of halftone dots in aninch. The line screen and printing resolution determine the levels ofgray that are produced in an image. The line screen is inverselyproportional to the levels of gray produced. If the resolution is heldconstant, increasing the line screen decreases the levels of graypossible in an image.

LinearizationThe calibration of equipment to a linear standard so that the outputvalue (of color or gray tone) equals (matches) the input value.

Mirror PrintAn image which is rotated horizontally 180˚. This produces a mirrorimage of the original.

Myriad FilmXANTÉ’s new polyester based material, specifically designed to beused with your PlateMaker or Accel-a-Writer printer and FilmStar.This computer-to-film technology produces high quality positive andnegative film from your desktop, without the time and expense ofcamera and darkroom procedures.

Myriad PlatesXANTÉ’s new polyester-based offset printing plate mediaspecifically designed for the PlateMaker II. Myriad plates go directlyfrom the printer to the press, eliminating many traditional print shopsteps, such as paste-up, negatives, halftone stripping and plateburning.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-13

Negative PrintAn image in which the white and black values are reversed.

NEITXANTÉ’s new Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT).This technology allows you to reduce the distortion of gray scaleimages and the plugging (filling-in) of small white spaces that werecommon when printing a negative image on a laser printer. SeeNegative Print, Ghosting, and Plugging.

NetworkComputer devices (Macintoshes, PCs, printers, etc.) that are linkedtogether by cables and are able to communicate with each otherusing one of many network operating standards (such as AppleTalkor Ethernet).

Null Modem CableA type of cable that allows serial communication between deviceswithout modems. It switches the transmit and receive data lines andwiring handshake lines to simulate modem protocols.

Off LineThe printer or controller is not accepting data from the hostcomputer. The On Line key LED is not lit.

On LineThe printer or controller is ready to accept or is accepting data fromthe host computer. The On Line key LED is lit. The printer orcontroller has to be on line to accept and print a job.

OutputComputer generated information in its final form. For example,printer output is a printed copy of the information. Monitor output isthe projected image of the data on screen.

ParallelInterface technique which transmits several bits of data at the sametime through different wires. Parallel transmission is generally fasterthan serial transmission. See Centronics Interface.

G-14 Glossarybb __________________________________________

ParameterA value to be used for a job or by a system. For example, pageorientation is a job parameter that can be set to portrait or landscape;flow control and parity are system parameters.

ParityThe addition of an extra bit to a packet of transmitted data to makethe total number of 1s either even or odd. A parity check is used inserial communications to help identify data transmission errors, sincea loss of data is likely to change the parity of the packet.

PDF FilePrinter Description File. A special file providing printer or controllerspecific information which is needed by QuarkXPress so that itworks smoothly with the printer or controller.

PeripheralA piece of equipment or device connected to a computer. Forexample, printers, controllers, modems, and scanners are forms ofperipheral devices.

Persistent ParametersParameters which last even if the printer or controller is powered off.

PhosphorA substance that glows when struck by radiation. Phosphors coat theinside of such things as monitors, televisions, and fluorescent lamps.

Point SizeTerm used to describe the size of a font. One point equals 1/72 of aninch.

PortA plug on a computer, printer, or controller through which data canbe sent or received. See Centronics interface and RS-232 Interface.

Portrait OrientationA page format that is larger vertically than it is horizontally. Theterm comes from painting when artists paint “portraits” on canvasesthat are taller than they are wide. See also Landscape Orientation.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-15

PostScriptA page description language developed by Adobe Systems. XANTÉprinters contain the Adobe Postscript language, not an emulation.

PPD FilePostScript Printer Description file. A file which provides softwareapplications access to printer or controller specific features. Optionsset using the PPD override printer default settings made from thefront panel or through XANTÉ Command Center.

Print DensityThe relative darkness or lightness of the print image on the page.Depending upon the XANTÉ printer, density can be changed eitherthrough the front panel, through a density dial, or through both.

Printer Control LanguageA set of printer commands, imbedded as software in the printer’scontroller, which contains all the instructions needed by your printerto describe page content and character and graphic placement.

Printer DriverA file that enables the application program to communicate with theprinter or controller. Usually the printer driver is installed within anapplication program.

Printer MarginThe imageable area of the printer (not the margin setting within anapplication). The portion of a page to which a printer can apply toneris the imageable area of that page.

Process ColorIn the printing industry, the representation of full color by combiningthree or more primary ink or pigment colors.

ProtocolA set of rules used to control how data is sent between devices.

G-16 Glossarybb __________________________________________

QueueIn the context of this manual, the print jobs on the controller’s harddisk or RAM disk waiting to be printed.

RAMRandom Access Memory. RAM is volatile memory available toprograms and documents. Any information stored in RAM is lostwhen the computer's power is turned off.

RAM DiskA percentage of available RAM set aside to store data temporarilyfor faster system access. Most XANTÉ printers allow you to specifya RAM disk to store fonts.

Raster ImageAn image composed of pixels or dots in a grid. See Bitmapped Imageand Vector Image.

RebootIn the context of this manual, a command which sends a PostScriptfile to the printer or controller directing it to reload the systemsoftware.

RegistrationExact alignment of printing plates to print a crisp, clear, image. Seealso X•ACT.

Resident TypefacesTypefaces that are stored on the printer’s hard disk(s), RAM, orROM. Resident typefaces allow the printer to produce a print jobwithout accessing the host computer for typeface descriptions.

ResolutionA measure of the image detail produced by a device. Printerresolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). Depending on themodel, XANTÉ printers feature from 600 x 600 dpi up to 1800 x1800 dpi resolutions.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-17

RGB ColorA color system based on the mixture of red, blue, and green. SeeAdditive Color Theory.

RIP (Raster Image Processor)The part of an output system that converts image data or pagedescription information into a bitmap format (by assigning each pixelits on or off value).

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer is a microprocessor architecturethat focuses on the efficient processing of a small, basic set ofinstructions. XANTÉ printers and controllers feature RISCprocessors.

ROMRead Only Memory. ROM is permanent memory. Information in thecomputer's ROM is retained even when the power is turned off.

RouterA device that connects two networks together. A router can connectnetworks with different cable types. A router assigns a specificaddress to each network and manages the traffic between these.

RS-232 InterfaceA 9-pin or 25-pin interface which transmits data in serial mode. RS-232 has five user-defined parameters: baud rate, data bits, parity,stop bits, and protocol.

ScreeningIn the context of this manual, the various methods used to simulatecontinuous tone images on a printer by varying the size, shape orfrequency of the dots printed on media.

G-18 Glossarybb __________________________________________

SCSISmall Computer System Interface. Pronounced “SKUH-zee.”XANTÉ printers feature a SCSI interface port through which youcan chain up to 6 external hard disks. The Accel-a-Graphix CT4 cansupport multiple internal SCSI drives. See also SCSI Cable and SCSICable Termination.

SCSI CableA cable which links two SCSI peripheral devices on a SCSI chain.See also SCSI.

SCSI Cable TerminationA device which reduces interference on the SCSI chain by physicallyterminating the line. See also SCSI.

SerialInterface technique which sends one bit of information at a time,sequentially, between computers and local peripheral devices such asa printer or controller. Serial transmission is generally slower thanparallel transmission.

SIMMSingle In-Line Memory Module. A small, compact, circuit boardcontaining RAM (Random Access Memory) chips. See also RAM.

SpectrophotometerA device that measures the light wavelengths reflected or transmittedby an object. The measurements are plotted to create a spectralcurve. The curve is compared to a standard, such as a color matchingchart. The difference between the two curves is used to generate atransfer curve.

SpoolerIn XANTÉ printers, a device used to hold up to 250 processed jobsprocessed by the controller, but not yet printed. The spooler isusually set up on the SCSI drive of the controller or printer. It allowsthe controller or host computer to continue processing jobsindependent of the printer’s status.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-19

Spot colorA single color assigned to a specific graphic or text image area andprinted without color separation.

StyleDefines a typeface in terms of weight, slant, and proportion.

Start-up PageA setting on most XANTÉ printers that prints a page with basicprinter information such as name, page count, RAM size, and harddisk setup.

Subtractive Color TheoryA color theory based on mixing specific quantities of three primarycolored inks or dyes on paper, or other media, to create all othercolors. The most common primary colors used are cyan, magenta,and yellow. These colors absorb (subtract) the wavelengths of red(cyan), green (magenta), and blue (yellow) from the white lightreflected by the paper. Because of the manufacturing limitations ofinks, however, a true black is not created from the combination ofthe three primary colors. Black ink is used to overcome thislimitation. The primary subtractive colors are usually referred to asCMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).

TCP/IPTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of protocolsdesigned to connect different types of networks.

ThinnetA commonly used IEEE Ethernet cabling standard. Thinnet, or10Base2, is a small diameter (.20 inches), 50-ohm coaxial cable.Thinnet cables are used to create bus networks. See also 10Base2.

TintA single shade of color or gray such as 10% gray or 20% magenta.

Token RingA network that connects workstations in a closed ring and that usestoken passing to enable nodes to use the network.

G-20 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Toning (Toner Scatter)When stray particles of toner appear on final output. Static electricitycauses extra stray toner particles to adhere to direct plate mediabefore printing.

Transfer CurveFiles which describe the difference between printer output and acolor standard. The transfer curves are used to adjust the printeroutput for hardware, ink, and media anomalies to producepredictable, standardized output.

Transmission ProtocolSee Protocol.

TrappingThe process of slightly overlapping colors of adjoining images toprevent a thin white line (misregistration) from appearing betweenthe images.

TypefaceA typeface is a set of characters. The characters in a typeface all havethree things in common: family, style, and character set. See alsoFont, Family, and Character Set.

Unshielded Twisted-Pair CableA commonly used IEEE Ethernet cabling standard. UTP, or10BaseT, consists of two insulated copper strands twisted about eachother to reduce outside interference of their signals. UTP cable,which is used to create star networks, is relatively inexpensive, easyto install, easy to modify, and may already exist in many installationsas part of the telephone network. See also 10BaseT.

Vector ImageAn image composed of a mathematical description of lines, curves,and geometric shapes. See Bitmapped Image and Raster Image.

___________________________________________ Glossary G-21

VellumA type of semitransparent media used in the printing industry toreplace more expensive film negatives. Vellum is used in screenprinting environments, such as in T-shirt printing. See also Myriad.

Volatile ParametersPrinter or controller parameters which only last during the currentpower cycle of the printer. For example, the PostScript parameterjobname specifies the name of the current printing job beingprocessed.

WPD FileWindows Printer Description file. A special file providing printer-specific information which is needed by Windows applications sothat the applications work smoothly with a XANTÉ printer orcontroller.

X•ACT (XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology)XANTÉ technology that compensates for print engine variations soyou can print more precise horizontal and vertical dimensions. Thisis critical when printing color separations and other jobs wherepinpoint accuracy is essential for registration. See also Registration.

X-HEIGHTThe height of a lower case letter without an ascender or descender ina typeface.

X-ScreeningXANTÉ’s method of using a dispersed dot screen, also referred to asstochastic screening. It varies the distance between individual inkdots in a seemingly random pattern. Areas with greater numbers ofdots appear darker while those with fewer dots appear lighter.

XON/XOFFA software-controlled protocol which controls the flow of data inserial communication. See also DTR/DSR.

◊ ◊ ◊

G-22 Glossarybb __________________________________________

_______________________________________________ Index I-1

Index

Symbols

∆E G-310Base2 cable G-310BaseT cable G-31200 DPI menu

Miscellaneous menu 5-16

A

Accel-a-Graphix folder 3-3Accel-a-Writer, status message A-12Accurate Calibration Technology G-

21. See X•ACTAcrobat folder 3-3, 4-4Additive Color Theory G-3Adobe

Illustrator B-15PageMaker B-8Separator B-15

Adobe AcrobatInstallation, Macintosh 3-3, 3-

5, 3-9Installation, PC 4-4, 4-5, 4-7

Adobe Downloader 3-5, 3-30Adobe PostScript

Download files, Macintosh 3-26, 3-30

Download files, PC 4-35Drivers, Macintosh 3-4, 3-5, 3-

9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-14Drivers, PC 4-8Drivers, Windows 3.1 4-4, 4-5, 4-

8Drivers, Windows 95 4-4, 4-5, 4-

16Drivers, Windows NT 4-4, 4-5, 4-

23Manuals 1-6

User Guide for PSPrinter 3-13Utility files, Macintosh 3-20Utility files, PC 4-29

Adobe PostScript 3 1-6, 1-8, 1-9Fonts, Macintosh 3-4Fonts, PC 4-4, 4-5Smooth Shading 6-15

Adobe PostScript Level 2Fonts, Macintosh 3-5

Adobe Type ManagerMacintosh 3-4PC 4-4, 4-5

AdobePS printer driver 3-10, 3-14, 4-8, 4-16

AG_CT4 folder 4-4Air vent 9-4Aldus Drivers 3-3, 3-23Align Paper, PC 4-35, 4-49AMD RISC processor 1-7, 1-8APD, Macintosh 3-22App Drivers folder 3-3, 3-22AppleTalk G-3AppleTalk, Macintosh 3-28Application notes B-3

AutoCAD B-12FreeHand, Macintosh B-4FreeHand, PC B-4PageMaker, Macintosh B-8PageMaker, PC B-8QuarkXPress, Macintosh B-6QuarkXPress, PC B-5

ATMATM 4.0.2 folder 3-4ATM folder 4-4ATM-J Upgrade folder 3-4

AutoCAD B-12Configuring B-12Default printer B-15Printing from B-14Resolution setting B-13

I-2 Indexbb______________________________________________

B

Banding A-20, A-22, G-4Baud rate 2-40, G-4

RS232 menu 5-18Bitmapped image G-4Bleed G-4Buffer G-4

C

CablesCentronics parallel 2-38During printer moves 9-4FCC Class A compliance vParallel 2-38SCSI disk 2-41Serial 2-39Shielded required vTroubleshooting A-14, A-15

Calibration G-4Halftone 1-8Halftone, Macintosh 3-36Halftone, PC 4-43Line length 1-8, 3-42, 4-49X•ACT 1-8, 3-40, 4-47

Cancel jobReset key 5-6Reset to stop A-13Timeout 5-16

CapacityLabels 7-12Manual feed tray 1-7, 2-32Paper Cassette 1-7, 2-11, 2-28Transparencies 7-11

Cascade printing G-4Cassette

Capacity 1-7, 2-11, 2-28, A-4Domestic 7-8International 2-28, 7-8Jam A-5Loading 2-30, 7-8North American 2-28Optional 1-9, 2-4

Selecting as source 7-9Standard 1-9, 2-4Tray chaining 7-10Tray Select key 7-9Using 7-8

Catch up G-5Cautions

Adhesives 7-3Cleaning the printer 9-6Downloading fonts to RAM 3-

44, 4-51Duplexer, lifting 2-17Fuser unit 7-3Inks 7-3Manual feed tray limit 2-34Media specifications 7-4Monitor 2-24Paper cassette limit 2-30Preprinted media 7-3SCSI disk 2-41, 2-42Temperature 7-3Toner cartridge 2-24, A-9

CD-ROM, XANTÉ UtilitiesPC 4-3

Centronics G-5Chaining 7-10Character spacing, Windows A-22Chooser

Auto setup 3-16Falling off A-18, A-19Manual setup 3-18Troubleshooting 2-38, A-15, A-

18, A-19Version required 3-10

Class A compliance ivClean.ps 3-20, 4-29Cleaning 9-5

Caution 9-6Cleaning solutions 9-6Solutions 2-3

Clearance 2-3CMS G-5CMYK G-5

_______________________________________________ Index I-3

Coaxial cable G-5Colophon, manual viColor gamut G-5, G-10Color profile G-6Color Rendering Dictionary G-6Color separation G-6Color space G-6Colorimeter G-6Command Center

Macintosh 3-24PC 4-31

CommunicationsSettings 5-8, A-15Troubleshooting A-15

ConfigurationPC Utilities 4-31PPD, Macintosh 3-16, 3-18PPD, Windows 95 4-20PPD, Windows NT 4-23Printer 3-19, 4-28Printer, Macintosh 3-4Printer, PC 3-20, 4-4, 4-29

Configuration menu structure 5-8Consumables, effect on Warrenty 9-

12Control-D, end-of-job 4-29, 4-35Copyright ivCorelDRAW B-12CRD G-6

CRD Directories, Macintosh 3-29CRD Directory, PC 4-35

CT4_cal.ps 3-20, 4-29Custom size 2-32, 7-9Customer support A-24

Bulletin board number A-26Fax number A-26Phone number A-25

D

D.ps 4-29Data bits 2-40Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18Data LED 5-4

Default settings G-7Densitometer 1-9, G-7

Macintosh 3-37PC 4-44

Density G-7Adjusting 7-18, 8-6Front panel menu 5-11

Diagnostic tests 2-36, 5-3, 5-4DIN-8 2-37Display window 5-4

Status messages A-12, A-16Troubleshooting A-16

Dot gain G-7Dots per inch G-7Double-sided printing 7-14Download fonts

Macintosh 3-30PC 4-51

Download PostScript fileMacintosh 3-26, 3-30PC 4-35

Downloads folder 3-4, 3-20DPI G-7

Front panel menu 5-12Line art 8-4

Drift G-7Driver G-15Drivers

Adobe PSPrinter, Macintosh 3-11AdobePS, Macintosh 3-14AdobePS, Windows 3.1 4-8AdobePS, Windows 95 4-16PageMaker B-8Windows 3.1, deleting 4-15XANTÉ PPDs, Macintosh 3-4, 3-5XANTÉ PPDs, PC 4-4, 4-8

Drivers folder 4-4DTR/DSR 2-40, G-6, G-8Duplexer 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-14

Duplex key 5-7Duplex LED 5-4Installing 2-15Jams A-9

I-4 Indexbb______________________________________________

Latches, warning 2-18Lifting, warning 2-17PPD option 6-10

Duplexing 7-15Edge style 7-16Recycled paper 7-15Selecting media 7-15Tumble style 7-16

E

Enable menuEtherTalk menu 5-20LocalTalk menu 5-20LPR menu 5-20Novell PServer menu 5-21Parallel 5-19RS232 5-18

End-of-file marker 4-29, 4-35, A-15Engine

Error 5-4Service E, service message A-14Speed 1-8

Enhanced Screening Technology 1-8, 8-9, G-8

PPD option 6-10Enter key 5-6Envelopes

Feeder source 7-8, 7-9Formatting 7-12Manual feed tray 7-9Printing 7-12Printing tips 7-12To avoid 7-4

Environmental requirements 2-3EP-Cart, status message A-12EPS, scanned images 8-5Error diffusion G-8EtherHelp 3-4Ethernet 1-8, G-8

Cabling A-15Port 2-36Troubleshooting A-14, A-15Upgrade 2-9

EtherTalk 2-9, 5-20, G-8Enable menu 5-20Mode menu 5-20Setting the zone name, Macintosh

3-21, 3-28Setting the zone name, PC 4-30Spool menu 5-20

Extra wide print upgrade 2-10

F

Factory default G-8Factory defaults

Baud Rate menu, RS232 5-18Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18Density menu 5-11DPI menu 5-12Enable menu, EtherTalk 5-20Enable menu, LocalTalk 5-20Enable menu, LPR 5-20Enable menu, Novell PServer 5-21Enable menu, Parallel 5-19Enable menu, RS232 5-18EtherTalk menu 5-20Flow Control menu, RS232 5-18Font Accel menu 5-15Gamma menu 5-12Initial Job menu 5-12Jam Recover menu 5-13Language menu 5-13LocalTalk menu 5-20LPR menu 5-20Manual Feed menu 5-13Mode menu, EtherTalk 5-20Mode menu, LocalTalk 5-20Mode menu, LPR 5-20Mode menu, Novell PServer 5-21Mode menu, parallel 5-19Mode menu, RS232 5-18NEIT menu 5-14Novell PServer menu 5-21Parallel menu 5-19Parity menu, RS232 5-18Protocol menu, Novell PServer 5-

21

_______________________________________________ Index I-5

RAM Disk menu 5-14Resetting 5-10RS232 menu 5-17Screen menu 5-15Spool menu, EtherTalk 5-20Spool menu, LocalTalk 5-20Spool menu, LPR 5-20Spool menu, Novell PServer 5-21Spool menu, Parallel 5-19Spool menu, RS232 5-19Startup Page menu 5-15Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19Timeout menu 5-16Timeout menu, Novell PServer 5-

22Toner Page menu 5-15Tray Switch menu 5-16

Fast ImagingPPD option 6-11

Fax, phone number A-26FCC compliance ivFeatures

AMD RISC processor 1-7, 1-8Densitometer support 1-9Font Accelerator 1-9Image shift 1-9, 6-12Mirror Print 1-9, 6-12Negative Print 1-9, 6-13NEIT 2-10Printer 1-6, 1-8RAM 1-9Resolution 1-6, 1-8Spooling 1-9, 6-15XANTÉ Enhanced Screening

Technology 1-8, 6-10XANTÉ Halftone Calibration

Technology 1-8, 6-11XANTÉ X•ACT 1-8

FIFO G-9File server G-9Film

Printing 7-10Selecting 7-3XANTÉ Myriad Film 1-7

FilmStar G-9FilmStar 2 1-7First job, status message 5-3, A-12Flow control 2-40, G-9

RS232 menu 5-18Font G-9Font Accel menu

Miscellaneous menu 5-15Font Accelerator 1-9, 8-9, G-9

Front panel menu 5-15Font downloading

Memory 2-11Fonts

Adobe PostScript 1-9, 9-7Adobe PostScript 3, Macintosh 3-4Adobe PostScript 3, PC 4-4, 4-5Adobe PostScript Level 2,

Macintosh 3-5Download, Macintosh 3-30Downloading, caution 3-44, 4-51Printer 1-9Printer, Macintosh 3-44Printer, PC 4-51Storage 2-41Update PPD, PC 4-35

Form Feed key 5-5Form Feed LED 5-5Formats, scanned images 8-5Formula, levels of gray 8-3FreeHand B-4

APD, Macintosh 3-22Application notes B-4Drivers, Macintosh 3-3PPD, Macintosh 3-23

Front panelConfiguration menus 5-8Diagnostic tests 5-4Keys 5-5LEDs 5-4Printer status 5-4Tray Select key 7-9

Front panel keysDuplex key 5-7Enter key 5-6

I-6 Indexbb______________________________________________

Form Feed key 5-5Menu key 5-6On Line key 5-5Reset key 5-6Test key 5-6Tray Select key 5-7

Front panel LEDsData LED 5-4Duplex LED 5-4Form Feed LED 5-5Manual LED 5-4On Line LED 5-4Printer icon LEDs 5-5Ready LED 2-35, 5-4

Ftp.ps 3-20, 4-29Fuser unit

Service A, service message A-14Warming up, status message A-14

G

Gamma 1-8Correction 8-6, G-10Curve G-9Custom gamma curve, Macintosh

3-39Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46Front panel menu 5-12PPD option 6-11

Gamut G-5, G-10Gateway G-10Ghosting G-10Graphics

Memory 2-11Gray, level of 8-3

Formula 8-3Grayscale G-10

H

Halftone G-10Halftone Calibration Technology 1-

8, 8-6Custom gamma curve, Macintosh

3-39

Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46PPD option 6-11

HalftonesResolution 8-5Scanning 8-5

Handling the printer 9-3Handshaking G-6, G-11Hard disk G-11

Caution 2-24, 2-41, 2-42External, connecting 2-41Font capacity 2-41Identifying 2-41Initializing 2-43Initializing, Macintosh 3-20Initializing, PC 4-30Start-up page 2-36

Holdout G-11Horizontal Image Shift 1-9

PPD option 6-12Humidity 2-3

I

IDE G-11IEEE G-11Imageable area G-11

Oversize 7-7, 7-13InitdskX.ps 3-20, 4-30Initial Job menu 5-12Initializing a hard disk

Macintosh 3-20PC 4-30

Initializing, status message 5-3, A-12Installation

Aldus FreeHand PPD, Macintosh3-23

Aldus PageMaker PPD, Macintosh3-23

APD, Macintosh 3-22Macintosh Utilities 3-5PageMaker PPD, PC 4-6Paper feeder 2-12PC Utilities 4-5, 4-6PPD, Macintosh 3-11, 3-15

_______________________________________________ Index I-7

PPD, Windows 3.1 4-10PPD, Windows 95 4-16PPD, Windows NT 4-23Printer drivers, Macintosh 3-11, 3-

14Printer drivers, Windows 3.1 4-8Printer drivers, Windows 95 4-16Printer drivers, Windows NT 4-23QuarkXPress PDF, Macintosh 3-23QuarkXPress PDF, PC 4-6, 4-28SCSI disk, external 2-41Toner Cartridge 2-24XANTÉ Utilities, Macintosh 3-5XANTÉ Utilities, PC 4-5

Instread.txt 4-5Interfaces

Ethernet 1-7, 1-8, 2-9, 2-36Illustration of 2-36LocalTalk 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-37Parallel 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-38SCSI 1-8, 2-36, 2-41Selecting 2-36Serial 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-38

Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17EtherTalk menu 5-20Illustration of 5-17LocalTalk menu 5-20LPR menu 5-20Novell PServer menu 5-21Parallel menu 5-19RS232 menu 5-17

Internal hard disk upgrade 2-10Internet support 1-6, A-26

J

Jam Recover menu 5-13, A-8Jams A-3

Cassettes A-5Clearing A-4Fanning 7-12Front cover, opening 9-3Labels 7-12Legal size A-18

Output tray 9-4, A-7Overloading 2-30, 2-34Paper path A-5Preventing A-3Recovery, automatic A-8

K

Keys 5-5Duplex key 5-7Enter key 5-6Form Feed key 5-5Menu key 5-6On Line key 5-5Reset key 5-6Test key 5-6Tray Select key 5-7, 7-9

L

LabelsAdhesives 7-4Feeder source 7-8Formatting 7-13Jams 7-12Printing 7-12Printing tips 7-12Selecting 7-3Storage 7-4To avoid 7-4

Landscape G-12Language menu 5-13

Factory default 5-13Laser beam, warning ivLaserWriter driver A-15, A-18LEDs 5-3

Data LED 5-4Duplex LED 5-4Form Feed LED 5-5Manual LED 5-4On Line LED 5-4Printer Icon LED 5-5Ready LED 2-35, 5-4Troubleshooting A-17

I-8 Indexbb______________________________________________

Legal size, troubleshooting A-17, A-18

Letterhead, Caution 7-3Levels of gray G-12

lpi 8-4Printer resolution 8-4

Lifting the printer 9-4Line art scanning 8-4Line Screen G-12Line screen, level of gray 8-3, 8-4Linearization G-12Linearization Tool, PC 4-38, 4-45Linearize

Macintosh 3-29, 3-36PC 4-36, 4-43

Linearizer, Macintosh 3-29, 3-38LocalHelp 3-4LocalTalk 5-20

Enable menu 5-20Mode menu 5-20Network 2-38Port 2-36, 2-37Spool menu 5-20

lpiLevels of gray 8-3QuarkXPress B-7

LPR 5-20Enable menu 5-20Mode menu 5-20Spool menu 5-20TCP/IP menu, Macintosh 3-28TCP/IP menu, PC 4-35

M

Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13Macintosh

Adobe Acrobat 3-9Adobe PostScript driver 3-4, 3-

5, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-14Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14Connecting to 2-37PPD 3-11, 3-15, 3-16, 3-18Selecting PPD options 6-4

Standard procedures 3-3Troubleshooting A-15

Macintosh UtilitiesApp Drivers folder 3-22Downloader 3-30Downloads folder 3-20Installation 3-5Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13XANTÉ Command Center 3-24XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38

Magnet, caution 2-24Main menus

Interfaces menu 5-10Miscellaneous menu 5-10

MaintenanceCleaners 9-6Cleaning the printer 2-3, 9-5

ManualUser Guide for Adobe PSPrinter

Driver 8.3 3-13XANTÉ PDFs 3-4, 4-4

Manual feed trayCapacity 1-7, 2-32, 7-9, A-4Double-sided printing 7-14Envelopes 7-8, 7-9Film 7-10Front panel menu 5-13Labels 7-8, 7-9, 7-12Loading 2-32Manual feed 7-9Manual LED 5-4Media size 1-8Media sizes 5-13Odd size media 7-9Over size media 7-9Preparing media 2-34Regular feed 7-9Selecting as source 2-35Transparencies 7-8, 7-9, 7-11Tray Select key 2-35Upper limit mark 2-34Using 7-9

Manual LED 5-4

_______________________________________________ Index I-9

ManualsAdobe PostScript manuals 1-6Conventions 1-5Copyright ivNotice iiiOverview 1-4Safety Information ivUser's guide 1-4, 2-4

Manuals folder 4-4Margin Adjustment, Macintosh 3-

25, 3-42Media

Caution, specifications 7-4Caution, temperature 7-3Coated 7-4Curl 7-4Embossed 7-4Envelopes 7-12Feeder source 7-8Film 7-10Guidelines 7-4Jams 2-30, 2-34, A-3Manual LED 5-4Perforated 7-4Preparing 2-30Preprinted 7-3Printing side A-4Selecting 7-3, 7-4Sizes 1-8, 2-28, 2-32Source 7-9Storage 7-3, 7-4Temperature requirements 7-3Textured 7-4To avoid 7-4Transparencies 7-11

MemoryResolutions 2-11Upgrades 1-9, 2-11

Menu key 5-6Raise numeric values 5-6Scroll through options 5-6

MenusBacking out of 5-6Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17

Lower numeric values 5-6Main menus 5-10Miscellaneous menu 5-10Raise numeric values 5-6Scroll through options 5-6Selecting 5-6

Mirror Print 1-9, G-12PPD option 6-12

Miscellaneous menu 5-101200 DPI menu 5-16Density menu 5-11DPI menu 5-12Font Accel menu 5-15Gamma menu 5-12Illustration of 5-11Initial Job menu 5-12Jam Recover menu 5-13Language menu 5-13Manual Feed menu 5-13NEIT menu 5-14RAM Disk menu 5-14Screen menu 5-15Startup Page menu 5-15Timeout menu 5-16Toner Page menu 5-15Tray Switch menu 5-16

Mode menuEtherTalk menu 5-20LocalTalk menu 5-20LPR menu 5-20Novell PServer menu 5-21Parallel menu 5-19RS232 5-18

Monitor, caution 2-24Moving the printer 9-4MultiAd Creator B-16Myriad film 1-7, G-12

Selecting 7-3Static 7-11

Myriad plates G-12To order 7-7

I-10 Indexbb______________________________________________

N

Negative Enhanced Imaging Technol-ogy G-13.See also NEIT

Negative image 8-6Negative Print 1-9, G-13

PPD option 6-13NEIT 1-9, 5-14, 8-8, G-13

Miscellaneous menu 5-14Upgrade 2-10

NetPeeks folder 3-4Network G-13

Ethernet 2-36LocalTalk 2-38

NetworkingXANTÉ Command Center,

Macintosh 3-27XANTÉ Command Center, PC 4-

36No EP-Cart, status message A-12Novell Print Server 1-8, 2-9

Macintosh 3-27PC 4-36

Novell PServer menu 5-21Enable menu 5-21Mode menu 5-21Protocol menu 5-21Spool menu 5-21Timeout menu 5-22

Novell.ps 3-21, 4-30Null modem cable G-13

O

Odd size mediaFold down tray 7-9

Off line, status message A-12On Line key 5-5On Line LED 5-4Options 2-9

Baud Rate menu, RS232 5-18Capitalized 5-9Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18Duplexer 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-14, 6-

10

Enable menu, EtherTalk 5-20Enable menu, LocalTalk 5-20Enable menu, LPR 5-20Enable menu, Novell PServer 5-21Enable menu, Parallel 5-19Enable menu, RS232 5-18Ethernet 1-8, 2-9Extra Wide Print 1-8Flow Control menu, RS232 5-18Internal IDE hard disk 1-8Lowercase 5-9Memory upgrades 1-9, 2-11Mode menu, EtherTalk 5-20Mode menu, LocalTalk 5-20Mode menu, LPR 5-20Mode menu, Novell PServer 5-21Mode menu, parallel 5-19Mode menu, RS232 5-18Paper cassette 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-11Paper feeder 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-

11, 2-12Parity menu, RS232 5-18Protocol menu, Novell PServer 5-

21Selecting 5-6SIMMs 2-11Spool menu, EtherTalk 5-20Spool menu, LocalTalk 5-20Spool menu, LPR 5-20Spool menu, Novell PServer 5-21Spool menu, Parallel 5-19Spool menu, RS232 5-19Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19Timeout menu, Novell PServer 5-

22XANTÉ NEIT 1-9

OrientationPage design B-19

Output tray, jams A-7Oversize printing

Imageable area 7-7, 7-13Manual feed tray 7-9

_______________________________________________ Index I-11

OverviewBack of printer 2-8Front of printer 2-7

Ozone iv

P

Page count 2-36Page design B-16

Orientation B-19Pitch B-20Point size B-21Spacing B-22Tips B-22x-Height B-21

PageMakerAPD, Macintosh 3-22Application notes B-8Drivers, Macintosh 3-3Line screen 8-5Macintosh B-8PPD, Macintosh 3-23PPD, PC 4-6Scanned images 8-5

PaperCoated 7-4Curl 7-4Feeder source 7-8, 7-9Jams 2-30, 2-34Letterhead 7-3Manual feed tray 7-9Perforated 7-4Preparing 2-30Preprinted 7-3Printing side A-4Selecting 7-3Sizes 1-8Storage 7-4To avoid 7-4

Paper cassette 1-7Adding a second 2-12, 7-9Capacity 1-7, 2-11, 2-28Domestic 7-8International 2-28, 7-8

Loading 2-30, 7-8North American 2-28Optional 1-9, 2-4Paper feeder 2-12, 7-9Preparing media 2-30Selecting as source 7-9Standard 1-9, 2-4Tray Select key 7-9Upper limit mark 2-30Using 7-8

Paper feeder 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-11, 2-12

Installing 2-12Optional cassette 2-12Printer Icon LED 5-5Tray chaining 7-10Using 2-12, 7-9

Paper guides 2-32, 2-34Paper handling 2-28, 2-32

Options 2-11Paper jam, status message A-12Paper out, status message A-13Paper path 7-11

Clearing jams A-5Illustration of A-5

Parallel 5-19, G-13Cable 2-38Enable menu 5-19Mode menu 5-19Port 2-36, 2-38Spool menu 5-19When to use 2-38

Parity 2-40, 2-41, G-14RS232 menu 5-18

Parmdump.ps 3-21, 4-30PC

Adobe Acrobat 4-7Adobe PostScript driver 4-8, 4-16Connecting to 2-38PPD 4-10, 4-16, 4-20, 4-23Standard procedures 4-3

I-12 Indexbb______________________________________________

Troubleshooting A-15XANTÉ Command Center require-

ments 4-31XANTÉ Utilities 4-3

PC UtilitiesConfiguration 4-31Installation 4-5, 4-6PDFs folder 4-28PS_Files folder 4-29XANTÉ Command Center 4-31XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4-

38, 4-45PDF G-14

QuarkXPress, Macintosh 3-23QuarkXPress, PC 4-6, 4-28

PDFs folder 4-4, 4-28Phone numbers

Bulletin board A-26Fax A-26Technical support A-25

PhoneNET 2-37Phosphor G-14PICT, scanned images 8-5Pitch B-20Point size B-21, G-14Port G-14Portrait G-14Ports

Ethernet 2-36Illustration of 2-36LocalTalk 2-37Parallel 2-38SCSI 2-41Selecting 2-36Serial 2-38

PostScript G-15Resident fonts 1-8, 9-7Typefaces 1-9

PostScript 3 Fonts folder 3-4Power

Source A-14Power cord 2-4, 2-35, 2-36

During printer moves 9-4Power fluctuations 2-35

Power switch 2-35Power up 5-3PPD G-15

Aldus FreeHand, Macintosh 3-23Aldus PageMaker, Macintosh 3-23Configuring RAM 6-14Duplex menu 6-10Enhanced Screen menu 6-10Fast Imaging menu 6-11Features 6-9Gamma menu 6-11Horizontal Image Shift menu 6-12Macintosh 3-11, 3-15, 3-16, 3-18Mirror Print menu 6-12Negative Print menu 6-13PageMaker, PC 4-6Resolution menu 6-14Save Spooled Job menu 6-15Selecting features, Macintosh 6-4Selecting features, Windows 3.1 6-

8Selecting features, Windows 95 6-6Selecting printer features 6-3Smooth Shading menu 6-15Tray Switch menu 6-16Using 6-3Vertical Image Shift menu 6-12Windows 3.1 4-10Windows 95 4-16, 4-20Windows NT 4-23

PPDs folder 4-4Preprinted media 7-3Print density

Adjusting 8-6Print quality 6-11

Banding A-20, A-22Character spacing A-22Gray, levels of 8-3Large vertical dots A-21Light images A-19, A-20Line screens 8-3Marks, vertical and horizontal A-

22

_______________________________________________ Index I-13

Scanner resolutions 8-3, 8-4Troubleshooting A-19Variables 7-3White lines A-21Windows A-22

Print resolution upgrade 1-6, 1-8, 2-10

PrinterAdjusting line lengths, Macintosh

3-26, 3-40Adjusting line lengths, PC 4-37, 4-

47Adjusting margins, Macintosh 3-

25, 3-42Adjusting margins, PC 4-35, 4-49Calibrate, Macintosh 3-29, 3-36Calibrate, PC 4-36, 4-43Cleaning 2-3, 9-5Configuration, Macintosh 3-4, 3-

19, 3-20Configuration, PC 4-4, 4-28, 4-29Diagnostic tests 2-36Download Adobe PostScript files,

Macintosh 3-26, 3-30Download Adobe PostScript files,

PC 4-35Download fonts, Macintosh 3-30Driver, Macintosh 3-11, 3-14Driver, Windows 95 4-16Engine speed 1-8Features 1-6Fonts, Macintosh 3-44Fonts, PC 4-51Front overview 2-7Lifting 9-3, 9-4Location 2-3Modifications, warning ivMoving 9-4Moving, caution 2-24Name 2-36PPD 6-3PPD, Macintosh 3-11, 3-15, 3-

16, 3-18

PPD, Windows 3.1 4-10PPD, Windows 95 4-16, 4-20PPD, Windows NT 4-23Printer information, Macintosh 3-

25Printer information, PC 4-34Printer status, Macintosh 3-25Printer status, PC 4-35Rear overview 2-8Restart, Macintosh 3-26Restart, PC 4-35Service messages A-14Setup 5-8, 6-3Spooling, front panel 3-32, 4-39Spooling, Macintosh 3-25, 3-32Spooling, PC 4-36, 4-39Start-up page, Macintosh 3-21, 3-

26Start-up page, PC 4-30, 4-31Starting 2-35Status messages A-12System parameters, Macintosh 3-

21System parameters, PC 4-30, 4-31Toner cartridge, warning 2-24Unpacking 2-5Weight 2-3Weight, warning 2-5, 2-12, 2-

17, 2-19, 2-23Printer drivers G-15

FreeHand B-4Macintosh 3-4, 3-5, 3-9, 3-10, 3-

11, 3-14, 3-22, B-4PageMaker B-8PC 4-8, 4-28Separator B-15Windows 3.1 4-4, 4-5, 4-8, 4-15Windows 95 4-4, 4-5, 4-16Windows NT 4-4, 4-5, 4-23

Printer Drivers folder 3-4Printer Icon LEDs 5-5

Manual LED 5-4, 5-5Tray Select key 5-5, 5-7

Printer margin G-15

I-14 Indexbb______________________________________________

Printer marginsAdjusting, Macintosh 3-25Adjusting, PC 4-35Definition 3-25, 4-35

Printer open, status message A-13Printing

Adobe PostScript User Guide 3-13Custom size 7-13Double-sided copy 7-14Envelopes 7-12Full-bleed 1-8Labels 7-12System Parameters, Macintosh 3-

21System Parameters, PC 4-30, 4-31Tips, envelopes 7-12Tips, film 7-10Tips, labels 7-12Tips, preventing jams A-3Tips, transparencies 7-11

Procedures 3-31, 4-39Custom gamma curve, Macintosh

3-39Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46Linearize, Macintosh 3-36Linearize, PC 4-43Printer margin adjustment,

Macintosh 3-42Printer margin adjustment, PC 4-49Spooling, Macintosh 3-32Spooling, PC 4-39X•ACT Calibration, Macintosh 3-

40X•ACT Calibration, PC 4-47

Process color G-15Processing, status message A-13Processor 1-7, 1-8Product Manuals folder 3-4Product registration 1-10Protocol G-15

EtherTalk 2-9Novell Print Server 2-9Novell PServer menu 5-21TCP/IP 2-9

PS_Files folder 4-4, 4-29PSPrinter printer driver 3-9, 3-11

Q

QuarkXPress 1-10, 8-6, B-5, B-6Application notes B-5Line screen 8-6PDF, Macintosh 3-3, 3-5, 3-23PDF, PC 4-4, 4-6, 4-28Resolution B-7Scanned images 8-6Screen frequency B-7

Queue G-16

R

RAM G-16Configuring PPD, Macintosh 6-14Configuring PPD, Windows 3.1 6-14Configuring PPD, Windows 95 6-14Start-up page 2-36Upgrades 1-9, 2-11

RAM disk 8-9, G-16Miscellaneous menu 5-14

Raster image G-16Read1st.txt 3-5, 4-5Readme file

Adobe PostScript User Guide 3-13Readme.pdf 3-5, 4-5Ready idle, status message 5-3, A-13Ready LED 2-35, 5-4Ready printing, status message A-13Reboot Printer

Macintosh 3-26PC 4-35

Registration G-16Release latch 2-5Reset 1, status message A-13Reset key 5-6

Back out of menus 5-6Cancel jobs 5-6

Reset to stop, status message A-13Resetting job, status message A-13

_______________________________________________ Index I-15

Resident Fonts 1-8, 9-7Resolution 1-6, 2-10, G-16

AutoCAD B-13Changing, example 5-9DPI menu 5-12Factory default 5-12Levels of gray 8-3, 8-4Memory requirements 1-7, 2-11PPD option 6-14QuarkXPress B-7Scanner 8-4Standard 1-8Start-up page 2-36Upgrade 1-6, 1-8, 2-10

RGB G-17RIP G-17RISC G-17RJ-ll 2-37ROM G-17Router G-17RS-232 G-17RS232 menu 5-17

Baud Rate menu 5-18Data Bits menu 5-18Enable menu 5-18Flow Control menu 5-18Mode menu 5-18Parity menu 5-18Spool menu 5-19Stop Bits menu 5-19

S

SafetyDuplexer latches 2-18Information ivLaser beam ivOzone ivPrinter modifications ivPrinter weight 2-5, 2-12, 2-17, 2-

19, 2-23Toner cartridge 2-24

Save Spooled JobPPD Configuration, PC 4-11, 4-20

PPD Configuration, Macintosh 3-16

PPD option 6-15Use 3-34, 4-41

ScannerFormats 8-5Halftones 8-5Line art 8-4Resolution 8-4

Screen angle, QuarkXPress B-7Screen Fonts folder 3-5Screen menu

Miscellaneous menu 5-15SCSI G-18SCSI disk

Cable 2-41Caution 2-41, 2-42During printer moves 9-4External, connecting 2-41Font capacity 2-41Identifying 2-41Initializing 2-43Port 1-8, 2-36, 2-41

Separations G-6Serial G-18

Cable 2-39Port 2-36, 2-38, 2-39When to use 2-38

ServiceMaking a service call A-24Messages A-14Service A message A-14Service B message A-14Service E message A-14

Set_IP.ps 3-21, 4-30Setup menu

Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17Miscellaneous menu 5-10

Setzone.ps 3-21, 4-30Shipment

Contents 2-4Damaged or incomplete 2-4Optional items 2-4

I-16 Indexbb______________________________________________

SIMM 2-11, G-18Simultaneous interfacing 1-7, 1-8Smooth Shading

PPD option 6-15Software, proprietary ivSpacing, character B-22Spectrophotometer G-18Spool menu

EtherTalk menu 5-20LocalTalk menu 5-20LPR menu 5-20Novell PServer menu 5-21Parallel menu 5-19RS232 menu 5-19

Spooler G-18Spooling 1-9

Front panel 3-32, 4-39Job status 3-35, 4-42Macintosh 3-25, 3-32PC 4-36, 4-39PPD option 6-15

Spot color G-19Start-up page 2-36, G-19

Command Center menu, Macintosh3-26

Macintosh Utilities 3-21Miscellaneous menu 5-15PC Utilities 4-30, 4-31Printing 2-36Test key 5-6Test print status message A-13Troubleshooting A-16

Startpg.off 3-21, 4-30Startpg.on 3-21, 4-31Static charge eliminator

Cleaning 2-25Illustration of 2-25

Status messages A-12Accel-a-Writer A-12First job 5-3, A-12Initializing 5-3, A-12Off line A-12Paper jam A-12

Paper out A-13Power up 5-3Printer open A-13Processing A-13Ready idle 5-3, A-13Ready printing A-13Reset 1 A-13Reset to stop A-13Resetting job A-13Test print A-13Toner low A-14Waiting A-14Warming up A-14

Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19Subtractive Color Theory G-19Surge Protector 2-35Sys/Start file A-12

Executing 5-12Sysparm.ps 3-21, 4-31

T

TCP/IP 1-8, 2-9, 3-21, 4-30, G-19Macintosh 3-28PC 4-35

Technical support A-24Bulletin board number A-26Fax number A-26Internet 1-6, A-26Phone number A-25Web page 1-6, A-26

TemperaturePrinter environment 2-3Warming up, status message A-14

Terminating resistors 2-37, A-15Test Directory

Macintosh 3-26PC 4-37

Test key 5-6Lower numeric values 5-6Scroll through options 5-6

Test print, status message A-13Thinnet cable G-19

_______________________________________________ Index I-17

TIFFPageMaker 8-5QuarkXPress 8-6Scanned images 8-5

Timeout menu 5-16Novell PServer menu 5-22

Tint G-19Token Ring G-19Toner

Low, status message A-14Redistribute 7-18Settling 7-17

Toner cartridgeCaution 2-24, A-9Disposal 2-24During printer moves 9-4Extra wide 2-4Handling 7-17Installing 2-4, 2-24Life of 7-17Magnet 2-24No EP-Cart A-12Redistribute toner 2-26Refilled A-4Replacing 7-17Sealing tape 2-27Standard size 2-4Storage 7-17Tips on handling 7-17Troubleshooting A-16Warning 2-24

Toner Page menuMiscellaneous menu 5-15

Toning G-20Top cover, opening 2-5Trademarks iiTransfer curve G-20

Macintosh 3-29PC 4-37

Transfer GuideCleaning 2-26Illustration of 2-26

Transmission protocol G-20Transparencies

Fanning 7-12Feeder source 7-8, 7-9Fold down tray 7-9Jams 7-12Printing 7-11Selecting 7-3Storage 7-4To avoid 7-4

Trapping G-20Tray chaining 7-10

PPD option 6-16Tray Select key 5-7

Tray Select key 5-7, 7-9Manual feed tray 2-35Paper cassette 7-9Printer Icon LEDs 5-5, 5-7

Tray SwitchMiscellaneous menu 5-16PPD option 6-16

TraysChaining 5-7Selecting 5-7

TroubleshootingBanding A-20, A-22Cables A-14Cannot print A-17Cassette A-16Character spacing A-22Chooser A-15, A-18, A-19Communications, PC A-15Display window A-16End-of-job marker A-15Envelopes 7-12Ethernet A-14Fold down tray A-16General checkup A-14Jams A-3, A-18Labels 7-12Large vertical dots A-21LaserWriter driver A-18LEDs A-17Legal size printing A-17, A-18Light image A-19, A-20

I-18 Indexbb______________________________________________

Macintosh A-14, A-15Media source A-16Miscellaneous A-16PC A-14, A-15Power cord 2-36, A-14Power source A-14Preliminary A-14Print quality A-19Safety information ivStart-up page A-16Status messages A-12, A-16Technical support A-24Terminating resistors 2-38, A-15Toner cartridge 7-17, A-16White lines A-21Windows A-22

TypefacesAdobe PostScript 3 1-9Miscellaneous B-17Resident 1-9Sans serif B-17Serif B-17

U

Unshielded twisted-pair G-20User's guide 2-4

Adobe PostScript, Macintosh 3-13Conventions 1-5Overview 1-4

Utilities, Macintosh 1-9App Drivers folder 3-22Downloader 3-30Downloads folder 3-20Installation 3-5Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13XANTÉ Command Center 3-24XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38

Utilities, PC 1-9Configuration 4-31Installation 4-5, 4-6PDFs folder 4-28PS_Files folder 4-29

XANTÉ Command Center 4-31XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4-

38, 4-45UTP cable G-20

V

Vector image G-20Vellum G-21Vertical Image Shift 1-9

PPD option 6-12

W

Waiting, status message A-14Warming up

Status message A-14Warnings

Duplexer latches 2-18Laser beam ivOzone ivPrinter modifications ivPrinter weight 2-5, 2-12, 2-17, 2-

19, 2-23Toner cartridge 2-24

Warranty 1-10Windows

Character spacing A-22FreeHand B-4Troubleshooting A-22

Windows 3.1Adobe Acrobat installation 4-7Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4-

5, 4-8Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14Driver, deleting 4-15PPD 4-10Selecting PPD options 6-8

Windows 95Adobe Acrobat installation 4-7Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4-

5, 4-16Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14

_______________________________________________ Index I-19

PPD 4-16, 4-20Selecting PPD options 6-6

Windows NTAdobe Acrobat installation 4-7Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4-

5, 4-23PPD 4-23

X

X•ACT 1-8, G-21Macintosh 3-26, 3-40PC 4-37, 4-47

x-Height B-21X-Screening G-21XANTÉ

Bulletin board support A-26Customer service A-24Enhanced Screening Technology 1-

8, 6-10Fax support A-26FilmStar 2 1-7Halftone Calibration Technology

1-8, 3-36, 4-43, 6-11Myriad Film 1-7NEIT 1-9Newsletter 1-10Phone support A-25Web page 1-6, A-26X•ACT 1-8, 3-40, 4-47

XANTÉ Command Center, Macintosh3-5, 3-24

AppleTalk menu 3-28Color menu 3-28CRD Directories menu 3-29Download PostScript File menu 3-

26General menu 3-24Installation 3-5Linearize menu 3-29, 3-36Margin Adjustment menu 3-25, 3-

42Networking menu 3-27Novell Print Server menu 3-27

Printer Information menu 3-25Printer Status menu 3-25Reboot Printer menu 3-26Spooling menu 3-25, 3-32Startup Page menu 3-26TCP/IP menu 3-28Test Directory menu 3-26Transfer Curve menu 3-29X•ACT Calibration menu 3-26, 3-

40XANTÉ Command Center, PC 4-

5, 4-31Align Paper menu 4-35, 4-49Chat menu 4-34Connection requirements 4-31Controller menu 4-32CRD Directory menu 4-35General menu 4-33Get Info menu 4-34I/O Timeout menu 4-34Installation 4-6Linearize menu 4-36, 4-43Novell menu 4-36Options menu 4-32Ports menu 4-38Print Info menu 4-34Receive Queue menu 4-34Reset Controller menu 4-35Select Product menu 4-33Send Ctrl-D menu 4-35Send PostScript File menu 4-35Set Printer Name menu 4-35Spooler menu 4-36, 4-39Status menu 4-35TCP/IP Address menu 4-35Test Directory menu 4-37Transfer Curve menu 4-37Update PPD Fonts menu 4-35X•ACT Calibration menu 4-37, 4-

47

I-20 Indexbb______________________________________________

XANTÉ Enhanced Screening Tech-nology 8-9

XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Tech-nology 8-6

Custom gamma curve, Macintosh3-39

Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46XANTÉ Linearization Tool, PC 4-

5, 4-6, 4-38, 4-45XANTÉ Linearizer, Macintosh 3-

5, 3-29, 3-38XANTÉ Utilities folder 3-5XANTÉ Utilities, Macintosh 1-9, 1-

10, 3-5App Drivers folder 3-22Downloader 3-30Downloads folder 3-20Installation 3-5Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13XANTÉ Command Center 3-24XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38

XANTÉ Utilities, PC 1-9, 1-10CD-ROM 4-3Configuration 4-31Installation 4-5, 4-6PDFs folder 4-28PS_Files folder 4-29XANTÉ Command Center 4-31XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4-

38, 4-45XInstall folder 4-5XInstaller 3-5XON/XOFF 2-40, G-6, G-21XUtils folder 4-5

◊◊◊